School PF Astral Projection Michael Reduga

1
Michael Raduga
I
School of Astral Projection
A Practical Guidebook
First Edition
www.obe4u.com
Translated by
Peter Orange
The practice of phase states of the mind is the hottest and most
promising pursuit of the modern age. Unlike in the past the notions
of !out"of"body e#perience$ !near"death meditation$ !lucid
dreaming$ and !astral pro%ection$ ha&e already lost their mystical
halo and their real basis has been studied in minute detail from the
most non"nonsense approach. 'o( this phenomenon is accessible to
e&eryone regardless of their (orld&ie(. )t is no( kno(n ho( to
easily master it and apply it effecti&ely. This te#tbook gi&es each and
e&ery person something that pre&iously could only be dreamt about "
a parallel reality and the possibility of e#isting in t(o (orlds. This
book is for pragmatic people (ho are not used to taking anything on
faith or reading about empty theories. The book only deals (ith (hat
(orks in practice and nothing else.
Proposals regarding translating and publishing this book and other
(orks of M. Raduga may be sent to aing*aing.ru
+
Table of ,ontents-
Part I
Entering the Out-of-Body State
Chapter ! General Background
The Essence of the Phase Phenomenon
.hy Enter the Phase/
The 0ifestyle of a Practitioner
1lgorithm for Mastering the Phase
Types of Techni2ues
,ontraindications
Recommendations for Using the 3uidebook
E#ercises for ,hapter 1
Chapter " ! Indirect #echni$ues
The ,oncept of )ndirect Techni2ues
Primary )ndirect Techni2ues
4econdary )ndirect Techni2ues
4electing the Right Techni2ues
4eparation Techni2ues
The 5est Time to Practice
,onscious 1(akening
1(akening (ithout Mo&ing
,ycles of )ndirect Techni2ues
6ints from the Mind
1ggression and Passi&ity
4trategy for 1ction
Typical Mistakes (ith )ndirect Techni2ues
E#ercises for ,hapter +
Chapter % ! &irect #echni$ues
The ,oncept of 7irect Techni2ues
The 5est Time to Practice
)ntensity of 1ttempts
5ody Position
8
7uration of an 1ttempt
Rela#ation
9ariations of Using 7irect Techni2ues
The Free"floating 4tate of Mind
1u#iliary Factors
4trategy for 1ction
Typical Mistakes (ith 7irect Techni2ues
E#ercises for ,hapter 8
Chapter ' ! Beco(ing Conscious )hile &rea(ing
The ,oncept of Techni2ues )n&ol&ing 5ecoming ,onscious
(hile 7reaming
Techni2ues for 5ecoming ,onscious in a 7ream
1ctions to be 7one (hen 5ecoming ,onscious (hile
7reaming
4trategy for 1ction
Typical Mistakes (hen Practicing 5ecoming ,onscious
(hile 7reaming
E#ercises for ,hapter :
Chapter * ! +on-autono(ous ,ethods
The Essence of 'on"autonomous Methods for Entering the
Phase
,ueing Technologies
.orking in Pairs
Technologies for )nducing the Phase
6ypnosis and 4uggestion
Physiological 4ignals
,hemical 4ubstances
The Future of 'on"autonomous Methods for Entering the
Phase
Typical Mistakes (ith 'on"autonomous Techni2ues
E#ercises for ,hapter ;
Part II
,anaging the Out-of-Body E-perience
:
Chapter . ! &eepening
The ,oncept of 7eepening
Primary 7eepening Techni2ues
7eepening through 4ensory 1mplification
4econdary 7eepening Techni2ues
3eneral 1cti&ity
Typical Mistakes 7uring 7eepening
E#ercises for ,hapter <
Chapter / ! ,aintaining
The 3eneral ,oncept of Maintaining
Techni2ues and Rules against Returning to the 5ody
Techni2ues and Rules for Resisting Falling 1sleep
Techni2ues against an Unrecogni=ed Phase
3eneral Rules for Maintaining
Typical Mistakes (ith Maintaining
E#ercises for ,hapter >
Chapter 0 ! Pri(ary Skills
The Essence of Primary 4kills
7iscerning the Phase
Emergency Return. Paralysis
Fighting Fear
,reation of 9ision
,ontact (ith 0i&ing Ob%ects
Reading
9ibrations
Techni2ues for Translocating through Ob%ects
Flight
4uper"abilities
The )mportance of ,onfidence
,ontrolling Pain
Moral 4tandards in the Phase
4tudying Possibilities and 4ensations
Typical Mistakes (ith Primary 4kills
;
E#ercises for ,hapter ?
Chapter 1 ! #ranslocation and 2inding Objects
The Essence of Translocation and Finding Ob%ects
5asic Property of the Phase 4pace
Techni2ues for Translocation
Ob%ect Finding Techni2ues
Typical Mistakes (ith Translocation and Finding Ob%ects
E#ercises for ,hapter @
Chapter 3 ! Application
The Essence of 1pplications for Phase 4tates
1pplications 5ased on 4imulation
1pplications 5ased on ,ontact (ith the 4ubconscious Mind
1pplication 5ased on )nfluencing Physiology
Unpro&en Effects
Use of the Phase by the 7isabled
Typical Mistakes (hen Using 1pplications
E#ercises for ,hapter 1A
Part III
Au-iliary Infor(ation
Chapter ! 4seful #ips
1 Pragmatic 1pproach
)ndependent 1nalysis
1pproach to 0iterature
Practice En&ironment
Talking (ith 0ike"minded People
The Right .ay to Beep a Cournal
Chapter " ! Practitioners5 E-periences
The 4ignificance of Other PeopleDs E#periences
1nalysis of 4elected PractitionersE E#periences
E#ercises for ,hapter 1+
<
Chapter % ! Putting a 2ace on the Pheno(enon
4tephen 0aberge
,arlos ,astaneda
Robert 1. Monroe
Patricia 3arfield
4yl&an Muldoon
,harles 0eadbeater
Robert 5ruce
Richard .ebster
,harles Tart
Chapter ' ! 2inal #est
Appendi-
1ssessment of PractitionersD E#periences Fchapter 1+G
1ns(ers to the Final Test Fchapter 1:G
1 4implified 7escription of the Easiest Method for Entering
the Phase using )ndirect Techni2ues
Take Part in Research
The ,ell Phone Techni2ue
1ttentionH
The 4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el
5rief 3lossary of Terms and 7efinitions
>
2ore6ord
This guidebook is the result of ten years of e#tremely acti&e
personal practice and study of the out"of"body phenomenonFthe
phaseG coupled (ith ha&ing successfully taught it to thousands of
people. ) kno( all of the obstacles and problems that are usually run
into (hen getting to kno( this phenomenon and ha&e tried to protect
future practitioners from them in this book.
This guidebook (as not created for those (ho prefer light empty
reading. )t is for those (ho (ould like to learn something. )t contains
no speculations or stories only dry hard facts and techni2ues in
combination (ith a completely pragmatic approach and clear
procedures for action. They ha&e all been successfully &erified by a
&ast number of practitioners that often had no prior e#perience. )n
order to achie&e the same result it is only necessary to read through
each section thoroughly and complete the assignments.
The book is beneficial not only for beginners but also for those (ho
already kno( (hat it feels like to ha&e an out"of"body encounter and
ha&e a certain amount of e#perience as this guidebook is de&oted not
only to entering the state but also e2ually dedicated to controlling it.
,ontrary to popular opinion there is nothing difficult about this
phenomenon if one tries to attain it (ith regular and right effort. On
a&erage results are reached in less than a (eek if attempts are made
e&ery day. More often than not the techni2ues (ork in literally a
couple of attempts.
Michael Raduga
Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel
January 11, 2!
?
Part
Entering the Phase State
Chapter ! General Background
#7E ESSE+CE O2 #7E P7ASE P7E+O,E+O+
The term phase state For simply phaseG encompasses a number of
(idely kno(n dissociati&e phenomena many of (hich are referred to
by &arious terms such as astral or out-of-"ody e#perience. This
concept also includes the more pragmatic term lucid drea$ing but
does not al(ays e#ist in the sense and form implied by that
e#pression. 6ence the term phase has been introduced to ease the
study of phenomena that e#ist beyond habitual I and often unfair "
associations and stereotypes. The term out-of-"ody e#perience is
accurate to the e#tent that it describes the sensation felt by a person
e#periencing the phase phenomenon.
% phase has t&o pri$ary attri"utes' 1() practitioners possess full,
conscious a&areness during the e#perience, and 2() practitioners
recogni*e a genuine separation fro$ the physical "ody(
4imultaneously the degree to (hich practitioners percei&e the
phase en&ironment affects the le&el of sensory e#periences therein
(hich often occur in a higher form than the sensory e#periences of
(akefulness. This concept is difficult to imagine (ithout firsthand
e#perience of the phase. 1nd so it is not (ithout reason that this
practice is considered to be a higher state of self"hypnosis or
meditation and is often referred to under different names as the
highest possible human achie&ement in &arious religious and
mystical mo&ements Fyoga 5uddhism etc.G.
@
)n essence the phase is an une#plored state of mind (here one is
unable to control and feel his physical body. )nstead his space
perception is filled (ith realistic phantom e#periences.
Interesting Fact!
Sensations in the phase state can "e so realistic
that practitioners &ho unintentionally enter phase
often "elieve they are still in the physical "ody, that
the e#perience is occurring in the &a+ing state(
These types of unintended e#cursions $ost often
occur at night or early in the $orning(

)t is belie&ed that up to one 2uarter of the human population has
encountered this phenomenon. 6o(e&er if &ariations and different
degrees of intensity of the state are taken into consideration it may
be safely assumed that e&eryone has encountered the phase. 4ince the
phase is a rare sub%ect of study many (ho inad&ertently enter it do
not reali=e (hat has taken place once they return to (akefulness.
Many do not assign any significance to the occurrence of a phase
en&ironment that is not fully formed because shallo( phases donDt
lea&e the same %olting impression as deep states. Elusi&e as the phase
may seem this is an e#tremely common phenomenon accessible to
1A
anyone (illing to consciously learn and apply the correct methods of
achie&ing and maintaining the phase.
)78 E+#E9 #7E P7ASE:
4uch a 2uestion can only arise from not fully understanding the
properties of the phenomenon and its nature. .hen one suddenly
understands at a certain moment that he is %ust as real as he normally
is and is standing some(here that is not in the physical (orld (ith
his same hands and body and can touch e&erything around him and
discern fine details such much emotion stirs up inside him that no
2uestions arise at all. This is the $ost a$a*ing e#perience that a
person can attain,
The initial phase encounter is al(ays %olting and sometimes
frightening. 7epending on the indi&idual fear e#perienced during
initial encounters (ith the phase occurs in about one"third of all
cases. E&en &eteran practitioners encounter fear (hich speaks to the
profound nature of the phase state.
.ith time as rapture ebbs and emotions (ane thoughts turn from
the fact of the phenomenon itself to(ards ho( to someho( use it.
1nd here a fantastically di&erse field of practical application opens
up before the practitioner. These applications I (hich this book
communicates I are not to be associated (ith the many unpro&en and
dubious methods often described in sundry esoteric literature. The
information presented herein is &erifiable practical and attainable.
.hate&er the nature of the phase " a state of mind or perhaps an
e#ternal e#perience " this is the sole opportunity to- &isit any part of
the (orld or uni&erseJ see people (ho are out"of"reach in real life
including relati&es the deceased celebrities and &arious creaturesJ
communicate (ith the enormous resources of the subconscious mind
and obtain information from itJ reali=e desires that are unattainable in
real lifeJ model artistic productionsJ influence physiology and more.
These are not dull e#periences. They are eminently personal and real.
#7E ;I2ES#8;E O2 A P9AC#I#IO+E9
11
)t must be said that &arious diets e#ercises rituals and so forth
do not produce noticeable supplementary effects to proper practice of
the phase. 'aturally e#istent psychological and physiological comfort
is of the utmost importance. Thus methods recommending
o&ereating under"eating or tormenting oneself (ith &arious diets and
strange e#ercises are useless and ultimately detrimental to a
practitionerDs (ellness and balance in&ariably producing a negati&e
impact to the effecti&eness of techni2ues taught in this guidebook.
1dditionally no meaningful association has been found bet(een
practice of the phase and (hat may be construed as !bad habits$.
Regardless of a lifestyleDs null effect on phase achie&ement a
healthy acti&e lifestyle (ill al(ays be recommended to en%oy a good
2uality of li&ing.
Interesting Fact!
-f one "elieves that it is necessary to position
one.s "ed &ith the head"oard facing the /orth&est
or so$e other direction in order to have $ore
effective out-of-"ody e#periences, then doing so &ill
invaria"ly have a positive effect on results(
0o&ever, the issue at hand is not the positioning of
the "ody, "ut a "elief that is a+in to an intention,
&hich in turn is enor$ously i$portant(
)t has been obser&ed that a regular and orderly lifestyle increases
the fre2uency of genuine lasting phase e#periences. 4leeping
normally and soundly is the most basic e#ample of a lifestyle choice
that produces direct positi&e impact on results especially (hen a
practitioner commits to a full nightEs rest se&eral times a (eek.
A;GO9I#7, 2O9 ,AS#E9I+G #7E P7ASE
1 no&ice practitioner must understand the procedure for learning
and mastering phase entry. This procedure consists of se&eral
primary steps each of (hich is a uni2ue science unto itself.

1+
1. The first and most important step addresses the techni2ues
used to enter the phase state. )t is not necessary to master e&ery
type of entrance techni2ue Fdirect indirect dream consciousnessG.
0earning and applying the easiest techni2ues pro&ides the
necessary prere2uisites to more ad&anced methods. )f so desired
it is possible to try more difficult entrance techni2ues in parallel
(ith the mo&ing on to the subse2uent steps for mastering the
phase.
+. ,ontrary to popular opinion the need for conscious
techni2ues does not cease upon phase entrance. )t is absolutely
necessary to learn and apply methods for deepening the phase to
achie&e a consistently hyper"realistic en&ironment. Failing to
apply deepening techni2ues almost guarantees that e#periences
(ill be dull uninteresting and subse2uent practice short"li&ed.
Practitioners should immediately learn and apply deepening
techni2ues after mastering any one entrance method.
8. The third step in&ol&es mastering techni2ues for maintaining
the phase as (ithout them the a&erage person (ould ha&e phase
e#periences of much shorter duration than is possible. .hen in
the phase the 2uestion of ho( to lea&e it almost ne&er occurs. On
the contrary one is normally thrust from it in the course of
se&eral seconds if one simply does nothing.
:. 1fter learning all the necessary techni2ues for mastering the
phase state it is time to learn and apply methods of control
(hich encompass the ability to translocate find and interact (ith
ob%ects influence surroundings and so forth.
;. Once the pre&iously noted steps ha&e been accomplished a
practitioner may proceed to apply phase e#periences to enhance
e&eryday life. O&er the course of this guidebook (e (ill e#amine
do=ens of these &aluable applications in great detail.
18
.ith basic skills mastered remember that practicing the phase is
(orth(hile and effecti&e only (hen the results are consistent. )f a
practitioner enters the phase only once a month the e#perience (ill
be too emotional to allo( the obser&ation of important principles and
methodologies. The phase should be encountered at least once a
(eek. .orking to(ard a le&el higher than a (eekly phase entry is
ambitious e&en beneficial. Realistically t(o to four phase
e#periences per (eek might be considered the le&el of a grandmaster
but this is far from the up(ard boundary.
1s a rule no&ice practitioners achie&e the phase less often than is
desired. 6o(e&er (ith regular attempts success occurs more and
more fre2uently (hich should help alle&iate any frustration resulting
from failed attempts.
#8PES O2 #EC7+I<4ES
There are three primary types of techni2ues that make it possible
to enter the phase- direct indirect and drea$ consciousness. These
methods are performed (hile lying do(n or reclining eyes closed
the body in a state of total rela#ation.
Interesting Fact!
Often, people have an out-of-"ody
e#perience &ithout prior +no&ledge or
1:
"elief in the pheno$enon( -t 1ust happens,
and a large "ody of evidence has "een
gathered to support this fact( 2ven $ore
interesting is that spontaneous e#periences
often occur after a "rief study of $aterial
a"out the topic, li+e this guide"oo+(((

3irect techni4ues are perfor$ed &ithout any noticea"le lapse in
consciousness( 5hile practicing direct techni4ues, a lapse into sleep
for less than 6 $inutes is not considered a "reach of the techni4ue(
5y definition direct techni2ues encompass the performance of
specific actions for a pre"defined inter&al of time. 4uccessfully
applied direct methods result in a phase entrance (ithout passing
through any intermediary states. For @AK of the population these
techni2ues are the most difficult because the mind naturally e#ists in
an e#cessi&ely acti&e state. )t has been clearly pro&en (ithin the
4choolDs student body that no&ice practitioners do not benefit from
beginning a training regimen (ith direct techni2ues. This is because
direct techni2ues re2uire a thorough understanding and masterful
application of indirect techni2ues in order to be effecti&e. The
incorrect notion that the phase state is e#tremely difficult to enter is
due to the fact that people are more often dra(n to the more difficult
direct techni2ues. )t is al(ays better to approach direct techni2ues
only after becoming e#pert in the use of indirect techni2ues.

-ndirect techni4ues are techni4ues that are put into practice upon
a&a+ening fro$ sleep(
The effecti&eness of indirect techni2ues is not dependent on the
length of the prere2uisite sleep cycle. )ndirect techni2ues can be used
(hile e#iting a full nightDs sleep after a daytime catnap or follo(ing
se&eral hours of deep sleep. The most important thing is that there is
a lapse of consciousness into sleep before implementing the
techni2ues.
)ndirect techni2ues are the easiest techni2ues to practice (hich is
(hy many practitioners use them to enter the phase. 4leep naturally
pro&ides the mind (ith deep rela#ation (hich is often difficult to
1;
ac2uire by other methods. 4ince sleep is re2uired to perform indirect
techni2ues it is a con&enient oft"occurring means to conduct
e#periments (ith the phase. 'o&ice practitioners benefit greatly from
the use of indirect techni2ues and learn firsthand the possibility of
phase entrance.

3rea$ consciousness is ac4uired "y techni4ues that allo&
entrance to the phase through &hat is co$$only referred to as lucid
drea$ing(
)n this case the phase begins (hen the a(areness that a dream is
occurring happens (ithin the dream itself. 1fter becoming conscious
(hile dreaming se&eral types of actions can be performed including
returning to the body and rolling out (hich (ill be described later.
.hen deepening techni2ues are applied in the conte#t of a conscious
dream the sensory perceptions of the phase surpass those of normal
(akefulness.
Techni2ues that facilitate dream consciousness are usually
categori=ed separately from methods used to perform out"of"body
tra&elJ in practice ho(e&er it is apparent that the characteristics of
dream consciousness and out"of"body tra&el are identical (hich
places both phenomena directly in the phase. These practices are
difficult because unlike other techni2ues they do not in&ol&e
specific actions that produce instantaneous results. 1 large measure
of preparatory steps must be obser&ed that re2uire time and effort
(ithout any guarantee of results. 6o(e&er dream consciousness
techni2ues are not as difficult as direct techni2ues. Moreo&er the
ma%ority of practitioners (hether using indirect or direct techni2ues
e#perience spontaneous a(areness (hile dreaming (ithout ha&ing to
apply techni2ues aimed at dream consciousness.
)n addition to the techni2ues described abo&e there are also non"
autonomous means and tools- &arious de&ices programs e#ternal
influences and so forth (hich can be used to enter the phase. )t is
necessary to mention that these are only useful to practitioners (ho
are able to enter the phase (ithout supplementary assistance.
1<
9arious chemical substances and herbal supplements ha&e been
recommended to assist phase entrance though using them is unlikely
to do any good and use of these has ne&er yielded the effect that can
be achie&ed through unadulterated practice. 1s such the use of a
chemical crutch is regarded here as completely unacceptable.
CO+#9AI+&ICA#IO+S
E#act scientific proof that entering the phase is dangerous I or
e&en safe " does not e#istJ there has ne&er been an e#hausti&e
controlled study to pro&e either supposition. 6o(e&er since the
phase e#ists at the fringes of naturally"occurring states of mind it can
hardly be assumed dangerous. 'otably the phase is accompanied by
rapid eye mo&ement FREMG (hich e&ery human e#periences for up
to + hours each night and this begins to e#plain the phase e#perience
as entirely safe and natural.
1lready confirmed are the psychological influences of the phase
on the physical mind and bodyJ namely the emotional effects that
can occur during the onset of the phase state.
Phase entry is a &ery profound incredible e#perience that may
induce fear (hich is in&oked by a natural instinct for self"
preser&ation. The phase can create stress. This is especially true for
no&ices and those poorly ac2uainted (ith the nature of the
phenomenon and techni2ues used to control it. .ithout kno(ledge
and proper practice a fear"induced reaction can escalate into full"
blo(n terror. 1fter all (hile in the phase fantasy 2uickly becomes
reality and reticent fears can take on hyper"realistic 2ualities. .hen
this occurs itDs not the phase en&ironment but the fear that is
treacherous. )t goes (ithout saying that fear is a to#ic influence
especially to sensiti&e souls the elderly and people (ith physical
ailments like certain cardio&ascular conditions. This does not mean
that persons in these groups should abstain from practicing the phase.
The solution is to learn about and a&oid common stressors associated
(ith the practice kno( the mechanics of controlling ob%ects and
understand the principles of making an emergency e#it.
1>
3i&en the possibility of negati&e phase e#periences it could be
ad&ised that practitioners limit the time in phase to fifteen minutes
though it is 2uite e#ceptional to maintain the phase for such duration.
Proposed time limits are entirely theoretical and moti&ated by the fact
that natural REM does not normally last longer than fifteen minutes
and at the risk of side effects due to the alteration of natural cycles
e#periments directed at unnaturally prolonging REM are not
recommended.
9ECO,,E+&A#IO+S
2O9 4SI+G #7E G4I&EBOO=
7uring classroom instruction at the 4chool of Out"of"5ody
Tra&el se&eral key factors are kno(n to produce positi&e and
negati&e effects to(ard the likelihood of success during indi&idual
practice-
Positi>e Effect on Practice +egati>e Effect on Practice
1ttenti&e thorough study of the
course material
6asty and inattenti&e study of
course materials.
,onsistent (ork (ith practical
elements.
)nconsistent application of
techni2ues.
7iligent completion of technical
elements.
1ppro#imating the techni2ues
outside of recommended
guidelines.
1 rela#ed approach to the sub%ect
matter.
1 hysterical approach to the
matter !idLe fi#e$.
Beeping a %ournal of all initial
attempts follo(ed by recording
successful phase entrances.
1 lack of personal analysis (hen
problems or a lack of success are
encountered.
1dhering to the recommended
number of daily entrance
attempts.
E#cessi&e number of attempts per
day.
Regular attempts and practice. 4poradic practice regimen.
1?
kno(s his field (ell and (ill do as ) (antM. This
attitude is good only for those
(ho ha&e a great amount of real
practical e#perience. Reading a
lot on the sub%ect or simply
ha&ing kno(ledge of it is not
e#perience.
E-ercises for Chapter
<uestions
1. .hich alternati&e states are included in the term
!phase$/
+. 6o( does the phase differ from out"of"body tra&el/
8. )s the perception of reality different in (aking life than
in the phase (orld/
:. 7oes the phase ha&e applications to day"to"day life/
;. .hat skills must be learned before proceeding to
practical use of the phase/
<. 6o( many types of autonomous phase entrance
techni2ues are there/
>. .hat is the difference bet(een direct and indirect
techni2ues/
?. .hich techni2ues are easiest for the ma%ority of
practitioners/
@. )s it (orth trusting &arious de&ices and programs that
promise to be able to help one enter the phase state/
.hy or (hy not/
1A. 4hould one eat meat (hen practicing the phase/
1@
#asks
1. Try to remember if you ha&e e#perienced phase
encounters in the past.
+. )f you ha&e encountered the phase (hat type of
techni2ue gained entranceJ direct indirect or conscious
dreaming/
8. )f possible ask some friends and ac2uaintances about
the sub%ect of out"of"body tra&el or conscious dreaming.
7o any of them remember a similar e#perience/ .hat
(as it like/
Chapter " ! Indirect #echni$ues
#7E CO+CEP# O2 I+&I9EC# #EC7+I<4ES
3enuine practice of phase entrance is best begun (ith the easiest
most accessible methods- indirect techni2ues (hich are conscious
actions performed upon a(akening from sleep. 4ome critics
incorrectly assume that indirect techni2ues are not ideal and prefer to
start (ith direct techni2ues. 6o(e&er doing so pro&ides no guarantee
for success and results in a large amount of (asted time and effort.
Starting practice &ith indirect techni4ues guarantees entrance into
the phase(
1 specific uni&ersal techni2ue that suits e&ery practitioner is a
myth since indi&iduals differ (idely in personality psychology and
learning speed. 6o(e&er there is a relati&ely easy uni&ersal
algorithm or procedure that accounts for the characteristics of each
person and allo(s for the most rational effecti&e (ay to attain the
initial phase entrances. This algorithm encompasses cyclic practicing
of the indirect techni2ues co&ered in this chapter. .ithout e#ception
these techni2ues " despite their &arying degrees of difficulty " are
suitable for e&ery practitioner (ho (ishes to e#perience the phase.
Results can be e#pected immediately follo(ing the first fe(
attemptsJ ho(e&er to achie&e measurable results an a&erage of fi&e
daily conscious attempts must be made. Making more than fi&e
attempts o&er the course of a day is fine too. There is nothing
difficult to understand about performing the techni2ues since they are
clearly laid out and based on real internal processes. Re$ar+a"ly, due
to correctly practiced indirect techni4ues, $ore than half of students
at the live school attain phase entrance after only t&o days(
Interesting Fact!
Many e#perienced practitioners prefer to "ypass
the effort associated &ith direct techni4ues and
hone their s+ills through the sole use of indirect
techni4ues(

)n order to ensure that oneDs efforts are most fruitful and
producti&e (e are going to indi&idually e#amine each step and
principle behind the actions in great detail. 0et us start from a
description of the techni2ues themsel&es (hich (ill actually apply
practically %ust as much to direct techni2ues as to indirect techni2uesJ
as they only differ in character and length of application.
There are plenty of techni2ues so after practicing all of the indirect
techni2ues presented in this chapter a practitioner should be able to
choose three or four of the most straightfor(ard indi&idually
effecti&e methods.
4eparation techni2ues (ill be e#amined later. They are completely
different from usual techni2ues (hich only bring one into the phase
but do not necessarily themsel&es lead to separation from the body. )t
is often also necessary to kno( ho( to stop percei&ing oneDs physical
body after employing these techni2ues.
)t is necessary to understand (hen to employ these techni2ues and
the importance of (aking from sleep (ithout opening the eyes or
mo&ing the body. 1ttempting to enter the phase immediately upon
a(akening must be learned and practiced to mastery since it
constitutes the main barrier to successful practice.
1fter e#amining the peripheral information surrounding indirect
techni2ues the cycles of indirect techni2ues (ill be e#amined
including (hat there are ho( they (ork and ho( they are best used.
4uccessful phase entrance is the direct result of performing these
cycles. 6o(e&er there are e#ceptions and it is not completely
necessary to proceed (ith these cycles if oneEs o(n mind someho(
hints (hat e#actly one should start from (hich (e (ill also e#amine
separately.

P9I,A98 I+&I9EC# #EC7+I<4ES
/ota Bene, The techni2ues described belo( are the simple
components of indirect techni2ue cycles. )mplementing each
techni2ueDs description is far from effecti&e. Of the list gi&en belo(
it behoo&es the indi&idual practitioner to choose the most
comprehensible and interesting techni2ues then acti&ely study and
apply the instructions for use.
OBSE9?I+G I,AGES
#esting Indi>idual Effecti>eness
)mmediately after (aking from sleep remain motionless eyes
closed. Obser&e the blank space behind the eyes for 8 to ; seconds
and try to locate recogni=able pictures images or symbols. )f nothing
appears during this e#ercise the techni2ue should be substituted. )f
something appears continue to passi&ely obser&e the images.
Mean(hile the images (ill become increasingly realistic literally
en&eloping the practitioner. 7o not aggressi&ely e#amine the details
of the image or it (ill &anish or change. The image should be
e#perienced as a panorama taking e&erything in. Obser&e the images
as long as the 2uality and realism increases. 7oing so yields t(o
possible results- the practitioner becomes part of the surroundings
and has achie&ed the phase or the image becomes borderline or
absolutely realistic and separation from the physical body is
possible.

#raining
To train the use of this techni2ue lie do(n in the dark eyes closed
and obser&e the blackness for se&eral minutes identifying any
specific images that may arise from simple spots or floaters and then
gradually transition to (hole pictures scenes or scenarios. .ith
practice this techni2ue is &ery easy and straightfor(ard. 1 common
mistake made during practice of this techni2ue is (hen the
practitioner aggressi&ely attempts to con%ure images &ersus passi&ely
obser&ing (hat is naturally presented.
P7A+#O, )IGG;I+G @,O?E,E+#A
closed. Try to (iggle a part of the body for 8 to ; seconds but
(ithout using any muscles. )f nothing mo&es during the attempt try a
different techni2ue. )f a sensation of (iggling occurs e&en in the
slightest continue to employ the techni2ue stri&ing to increase the
range of mo&ement as much as possible. This techni2ue should be
performed &ery aggressi&ely not passi&ely. 1s soon as the range of
mo&ement nears or e#ceeds four inches " (hich may take %ust se&eral
seconds " the follo(ing situations may arise- one momentarily finds
oneself someho( in the phase or the (iggled part of the body begins
to mo&e freely. The occurrence of mo&ement during practice of this
techni2ue allo(s the practitioner to transition to a separation
techni2ue and attempt to lea&e the body.
.hile practicing phantom (iggling strong &ibrations may occur
amid (hich separation may be attempted. 4ounds also often arise
allo(ing the opportunity to practice listening in (hich can lead to
phase entrance.
The phantom (iggling techni2ue is not meant to produce an
imagined mo&ement by a phantom body. The point of the techni2ue
is to attempt the mo&ement of a physical body part (ithout using
muscular action. That is the focus should rest upon an internal
intention of mo&ement (ithout physical action. .hen the sensation
occurs it differs little from its real counterpart and is often
accompanied by hea&iness and resistance. 3enerally there is &ery
little range of mo&ement at first but (ith concentrated effort the
range of mo&ement noticeably increases.
)t does not matter (hich part of the body is used to e#ercise
phantom mo&ement. )t may be the (hole body or %ust one finger.
'either is the speed of the mo&ement important. )ncreased range of
percei&ed mo&ement is the aim of the techni2ue.
#raining
To train the techni2ue of phantom (iggling rela# a hand for
se&eral minutes (hile lying do(n eyes closed. Then aggressi&ely
en&ision the follo(ing hand mo&ements (ithout mo&ing any
muscles for t(o to three minutes each- rotating up"do(n left"right
e#tending the fingers and dra(ing the fingers together clenching and
unclenching a fist. 'o sensations (ill occur at first. 3radually the
sensation of muscular action (ill become so apparent that the
percei&ed mo&ement (ill be indistinguishable from real mo&ement.
7uring the first training attempts practitioners are often tempted to
open their eyes to see if actual mo&ement is occurring I thatDs ho(
real the sensation feels.
;IS#E+I+G I+
closed. Try to listen to noise in your head. 7o this for 8 to ; seconds
(ithout mo&ing and (ithout opening the eyes. )f nothing happens
during this period of time s(itch to another techni2ue. )f any sounds
like bu==ing humming ra&ing hissing (histling tinkling or
melodies occur listen attenti&ely. .ith results the sound (ill
increase in &olume. 0isten in as long as there is some dynamism in
the &olume of the sound. .hen the sound stops or the noise becomes
loud enough a separation techni2ue may be attempted. 4ometimes
the noise itself thro(s one into the phase (hile listening. 1t a certain
stage sounds may be e#tremely loud and ha&e e&en been described
as comparable to the roar of a %et"engine.
The action of listening in consists of acti&ely and attenti&ely
e#ploring a sound the (hole of its tonality and range and ho( it
reacts to the listener.
There is an optional techni2ue kno(n as forced listening in (here
it is simply necessary to strongly (ant to hear noise and mean(hile
make intuiti&e internal efforts (hich as a rule are correct.
Performed correctly forced sounds (ill intensify the same (ay as
those percei&ed (ith the standard listening in techni2ue.
#raining
)n order to practice listening in lie do(n in a silent place eyes
closed and listen for sounds originating in the head. These attempts
are usually cro(ned (ith success (ithin se&eral minutes of trying
and one starts to hear that noise that absolutely e&eryone has (ithin.
One simply has to kno( ho( to tune in to it.
9O#A#IO+
closed. )magine the physical body is rotating along an a#is for ; to 1A
seconds. )f no unusual sensations occur try another techni2ue. )f
&ibrations occur during rotation or the mo&ement suddenly feels
realistic then continue the rotation techni2ue as long as there is
progress in the sensationDs de&elopment. There are se&eral possible
outcomes (hen rotation is practiced. The imagined rotation is
replaced by a &ery real sensation of rotating along an imagined a#is.
.hen this occurs a practitioner may easily lea&e the body. The other
outcome is the sudden presence of strong &ibrations or loud sounds
amid (hich separation from the body is possible. 7uring rotation
separation has been kno(n to spontaneously occur and the
practitioner enters the phase.

#raining
To practice rotation imagine re&ol&ing around the head"to"foot
a#is for se&eral minutes (hile lying do(n eyes closed. )t is not
necessary to focus on the &isual effects of rotation or minute
sensations in the body. The key factor is the &estibular sensation that
arises from internal rotation. 1s a rule many practitioners e#perience
difficulty performing full rotation. One person may be limited to @A
degrees of mo&ement (here another e#periences 1?A degrees. .ith
consistent correct practice full 8<A degree rotation (ill occur.

2O9CE& 2A;;I+G AS;EEP
closed. Picture a s(ift compulsory fall into sleep for ; to 1A seconds
and then return to (akefulness follo(ed by an aggressi&e attempt at
separating from the physical body. 3enerally after performing this
techni2ue the practitionerDs state of mind 2uickly transitions bet(een
different states of brain. 4trong &ibrations often occur (hen emerging
from this !pseudo"sleep$ (here the likelihood of separation from the
body is increased accompanied the opportunity to practice other
techni2ues. Resist actually falling asleep during this e#ercise.
)n essence forced falling asleep is a trick on the mind designed to
take ad&antage of the brainDs refle#i&e responses to actions that
immediately induce semi"conscious states that allo( easy entrance
into the phase. Employing it is especially effecti&e upon an e#tremely
alert a(akening or after a mo&ement is unintentionally made upon
a(akening.
Forced sleep is 2uite simple. )t re2uires a cessation of internal
dialogue shifting mental focus a(ay from e#ternal stimuli and a
strong desire for a 2uick reentrance to the sleeping state follo(ed by
rene(ed (akefulness after se&eral seconds. )n order to understand
ho( this is done it is sufficient to recall ho( one had urgently made
oneself fall asleep before or ho( one had fallen asleep after ha&ing
been e#hausted or after a long period of sleep depri&ation.
1 common mistake in practice occurs (hen people fall asleep
after attempting the techni2ue forgetting the necessary desire to
2uickly return to consciousness.
SECO+&A98 I+&I9EC# #EC7+I<4ES
S#9AI+I+G #7E B9AI+
closed. Make + to 8 s2uee=es straining the brain. This is kno(n as
straining the brain. )f nothing happens try another techni2ue. )f
&ibrations occur during this e#ercise try to mo&e the &ibrations
around the body and amplify them by continuing to strain the brain.
The stronger the &ibrations the higher the probability that a
separation techni2ue may be applied. 4pontaneous separation may
occur. .hile straining the brain a practitioner may e#perience the
sounds necessary for transitioning to a listening in techni2ue.
The &ibrations that arise from straining the brain are &ery striking.
)f there is any doubt as to (hether the &ibrations happened then most
likely a practitioner did not e#perience them. The &ibrations may be
described as an intense painless electrical current mo&ing through or
gripping the body. 1t times the sensation of a total numbing of the
body is e#perienced.

#raining
To practice straining the brain lie do(n eyes closed and attempt
to strain the brain. 7o not think about the fact that actually s2uee=ing
the brain is impossible. The imagined straining should be spasmodic
rhythmic. Practitioners may strain the entire brain or specific parts of
it. 7uring the process a sensation of pressure or e&en real strain
arises in the brain. .ith @;K of practitioners this strain usually
occurs (ithin the first fe( minutes of e#ercise. This techni2ue should
be committed to memory (hen training so that it may be instantly
recalled and practiced upon a(akening from sleep.
Practitioners often make the mistake of unintentionally straining
their facial and neck muscles instead of straining the interior of their
heads. This error should be a&oided at all costs lest it become a habit
that frustrates genuine practice.

S#9AI+I+G #7E BO&8 )I#7O4# 4SI+G ,4SC;ES

This techni2ue in&ol&es straining the (hole body and differs little
from straining the brain. .hen a(akening from sleep make one to
three attempts at straining the (hole body refraining from actually
fle#ing any physical muscle. )f nothing happens try another
techni2ue. 9ibrations may occur as a result and amplifying these by
straining the body (ithout using muscles can induce a spontaneous
separation from the body. .hen the &ibrations become strong
enough attempt a separation techni2ue. 4ounds often arise during the
&ibration (hich allo( for listening in and a subse2uent entrance to
the phase.

#raining
To practice- (hile lying do(n eyes closed try to strain the entire
body (ithout using physical muscles for se&eral minutes. Tingling
internal pressure and a strain on the brain often occur during this
e#ercise. Remember to a&oid straining any real muscles. )f physical
strain occurs results may be forfeited in the critical moment of
fruition.
?IS4A;IBA#IO+
closed. For three to fi&e seconds con%ure an intense desire to see and
literally create a specific ob%ect. The ob%ect should be en&isioned at
rest about four to eight inches from the practitioner. 0imit the
&isuali=ation to simple familiar ob%ects like an apple flo(er sphere
or hand. 4ometimes it is useful to imagine an ob%ect floating %ust
abo&e the eyebro(s instead of directly in front. )f nothing appears
during this period of time a different techni2ue should be used.
)f an ob%ect appears one should keep looking hard at it and at a
certain moment one (ill reali=e that one is already standing ne#t to it
some(here in the (orld of the phase. .hen the ob%ect becomes
realistic one can also try to separate from oneDs body on oneDs o(n.

SE+SO98-,O#O9 ?IS4A;IBA#IO+
closed. )magine acti&e physical mo&ement for 1A to 1; seconds
(hile touching an actual ob%ect and simultaneously e#amining the
imagined details of the room. )f nothing appears during this period of
time a different techni2ue should be used. )f real and imagined
sensations become mi#ed then continue the practice until the
imagined sensations o&ercome the primary senses.
I,AGI+E& ,O?E,E+#
closed. For ; to 1A seconds concentrate on &isuali=ing any of the
follo(ing actions- (iggling (alking running somersaulting pulling
a rope or s(imming. Try to imagine the mo&ement as a realistic and
acti&e e&ent during the practice period. )f nothing happens a
different techni2ue should be employed. )f results occur in the form
of the sensation of mobility the imagined mo&ement should be
continued until it becomes the dominant sensation. .hen the
mo&ement achie&es primacy it is accompanied by translocation to
the phase. )f such a translocation does not automatically occur a
separation techni2ue is recommended.

I,AGI+E& SE+SA#IO+S
closed. For three to fi&e seconds en&ision that a specific ob%ect is
being held in the hand. )f nothing happens a different techni2ue
should be practiced. )f the impression of shape and (eight become
apparent concentrate harder on the sensation trying to compound the
e#perience. Once the ob%ectDs presence in the hand achie&es a
realistic 2uality separation is possible. 6o(e&er it is preferable to
continue handling the ob%ect. 1 practitioner is free to imagine any
type of ob%ect that fits in the hand. E#amples include a telephone a
drinking glass a remote control a ball a pen or a bo#.
I,AGI+E& SO4+&S
Upon a(akening (ithout mo&ing or opening oneDs eyes one
should acti&ely try to hear a specific sound or (ord e.g. someoneDs
name or a melody. )f nothing happens the techni2ue should be
changed for another one. )f sound arises one should try to listen in to
it. .hen it peaks in &olume one may try to separate.
E8E ,O?E,E+#
closed. Perform t(o to fi&e sharp left"right or up"do(n eye
mo&ements. )f nothing happens the techni2ue should be e#changed
for another. )f &ibrations occur separation may be attempted after
efforts to intensify the &ibrations.
&O# O+ #7E 2O9E7EA&
closed. For three to fi&e seconds &isuali=e a point in the middle of
the forehead. )f nothing happens a different techni2ue should be
used. )f &ibrations occur they may be intensified by using this
techni2ue or by straining the brain facilitating separation from the
body. 1lso sounds may arise that allo( the practice of listening in.

2EA9 ,E#7O&
closed. For three to fi&e seconds imagine something horrific and
gra&eyard"related staying nearby something graphic macabre out of
the (orst nightmare imaginable. )f nothing happens a different
techni2ue should be employed. 6o(e&er acute fear may occur most
likely forcing the practitioner into the phase (here a separation
techni2ue may be applied. 1lternati&ely &ibrations or noise may
arise and allo( the use of other indirect techni2ues. 1 common
problem (ith the use of this techni2ue is that fear often makes the
practitioner so uncomfortable in the phase that he desires nothing else
than to return to (akefulness.

9ECA;;I+G #7E P7ASE S#A#E
closed. For three to fi&e seconds recall the sensations that
accompanied a pre&ious phase e#perience. FThis only (orks if the
practitioner has achie&ed phase entrance in the past.G Either nothing
(ill happen and a different techni2ue should be used or these
sensations (ill be recalled and separating from the body may be tried
" if it doesnDt occur spontaneously. 9ibrations or noise may also arise
during this techni2ue in (hich case listening in or straining the brain
may be practiced.
B9EA#7I+G CO+CE+#9A#IO+
closed. For three to fi&e seconds focus on breathingJ the rise and fall
of the rib cage the inflation and deflation of the lungs the intake and
escape of air. )f no results occur a different techni2ue should be
used. )f &ibrations noise or spontaneous separation occur the
practice of this techni2ue should be intensified and used to its full
ad&antage.
SE;EC#I+G #7E 9IG7# #EC7+I<4ES
The ne#t step to mastering indirect techni2ues is choosing the
right techni2ues that suit indi&idual predispositions. There is no point
in going for one techni2ue or another only because they look
interesting and because someone (rote a lot or spoke a lot about
them. The choice should be based strictly upon (hat suits an
indi&idual practitioner.
Out of all of the enumerated primary indirect techni2ues
practically only straining the brain (orks easily and 2uickly for @;K
of practitioners. 1ll other techni2ues (ork immediately for only
about +;K to ;AK of practitioners during initial training. 6o(e&er
after se&eral training sessions each techni2ue yields results for >;K
of engaged practitioners.
One (ay or another e&ery practitioner should identify a certain
set of techni2ues that (orks best. 1 set should consist of no less than
three techni2uesJ four or fi&e is e&en better to allo( more options and
practical combinations. 'on"(orking techni2ues should not be
discarded (holesale by the indi&idual because they afford an
opportunity to achie&e success through ne( pre&iously unresponsi&e
e#periences.
To ensure the correct selection of techni2ues each should be
separately practiced o&er a period of at least three days. To this end
one should e#periment (ith each of the primary techni2ues for + to
1A minutes before falling asleep or e&en during the day. )t is good to
choose at least one secondary techni2ue practice. This regimen
allo(s a precise determination of the techni2ues that (ill yield the
best results for the practitioner. 7uring the process of selecting
personali=ed techni2ues a practitioner learns and retains the
techni2ues in an intimate personal (ay (hich positi&ely affects ho(
techni2ues are used during critical moments.
)t is (orth noting that the final selection of techni2ues should be
&aried. For e#ample choosing both straining the brain and straining
the body (ithout using muscles is pointless because they are
practically one and the same. More often than not they (ill both
either (ork or not (ork. This is (hy techni2ues should in&ol&e
&arious types of sensory perception- &isual audio kinesthetic
&estibular imaginary sense perception and internal strain.
Remember that priorities and goals change (ith time and that a
techni2ue that fell flat during initial attempts may une#pectedly pro&e
&aluable later on. 5e fle#ible. 'o set of techni2ues should be car&ed
in stone. )n fact the set may change se&eral times o&er the first fe(
(eeks as the practitioner disco&ers (hat produces the best indi&idual
results.
To close this section a list has been pro&ided detailing the most
effecti&e indirect techni2ues. This list (as compiled (ith classroom
data from the 4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el and may pro&e helpful
in determining an effecti&e set of indirect techni2ues.
#he ,ost Effecti>e Indirect #echni$ues at School of Out-of-
Body #ra>el Se(inars
Obser&ing )mages 1;K
Phantom .iggling 1;K
0istening in 1;K
Rotation 1AK
4training the 5rain ;K
4training the 5ody .ithout Using Muscles ;K
Forced Falling 1sleep ;K
Mi#ture of Techni2ues 1AK
Other Techni2ues +AK
SEPA9A#IO+ #EC7+I<4ES
0et us begin (ith a totally shocking fact- during one"third of
successful indirect entries into the phase it is not necessary to
perform any specific phase entry techni2ues as separation techni2ues
are immediately successfulN This has been statistically pro&en at
4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el seminars and in the analyses of other
sources. ,on&ersely an incorrect understanding of separation
techni2ues may lead to undesirable conse2uences. )t is possible for a
practitioner to enter the phase state and be unable to separate from the
body. Therefore it is &ery important to understand ho( separation
techni2ues (ork since they are often a key to success.
Interesting Fact!
Relatively often, a practitioner &ill try to e$ploy
separation techni4ues to no effect, ho&ever, he &ill
later une#pectedly understand that he had "een
lying in a different position than he sensed that he
&as in, and in fact, it had only "een necessary for
hi$ to stand up( This happens $ostly a$ong
"eginners and is indicative of an incorrect
understanding of separation techni4ues(

1t times a practitioner may only need to think about separation and
it happens. This is a rarity (hich e#plains the e#istence of a (hole
series of au#iliary techni2ues. The most important separation
techni2ues are rolling out getting up climbing out and le&itation.
9O;;I+G O4#
.hile a(akening attempt to roll o&er to the edge of the bed or the
(all (ithout using any muscles. 7onDt (orry about falling out of bed
hitting the (all or be concerned (ith the details of ho( this
techni2ue should feel. Cust roll.
GE##I+G 4P
Upon a(akening attempt to get out of bed (ithout physical
e#ertion. This should be performed in a (ay that is most comfortable
for the practitioner.
C;I,BI+G O4#
.hile a(akening try to climb out of the body (ithout using any
muscles. This techni2ue generally comes to mind (hen a partial
separation has been achie&ed through the use of other techni2ues or
one part of the body has completely separated.

;E?I#A#IO+
Upon a(akening attempt to le&itate up(ard parallel to the bed.
.hile attempting to le&itate do not (onder ho( it should be
accomplishedJ e&eryone intuiti&ely kno(s ho( to le&itate from their
e#periences in dreams.
2A;;I+G O4#
Practically the same as le&itation- upon a(akening try to sink
do(n through the bed.
P4;;I+G O4#
6ere upon a(akening try to e#it the body through the head as if
escaping from a lidded cocoon.

BAC=)A9&S 9O;;
1fter a(akening try to perform a back(ards somersault o&er the
head (ithout using any physical muscles.
B4;GE #7E E8ESC
Upon a(akening bulge out or (iden the eyes (ithout opening
them. Frontal mo&ement to(ard separation may result.
4eparation techni2ues are united by a singular idea- nothing
should be imagined mo&ement should be attempted (ithout the use
of physical muscles. The techni2ues produce the same sensations of
mo&ement felt in real life. )f nothing happens immediately after
trying then the techni2ue is not going to (ork though it may deli&er
results at a later time. 1 practitioner (ill instantly be able to
recogni=e if the techni2ue has (orked. 6o(e&er people are often
unprepared for the realness of the sensations and think that they are
making a physical mo&ement instead of reali=ing that a part or all of
the body has separated. 1fter this unfortunate failure careful analysis
helps to understand (hat happened and plan for a successful retry.
)f separation (as incomplete or took place (ith some difficulty
this is a signal that the techni2ue is being performed correctly.
4trength and aggressi&e effort are re2uired from this point to achie&e
complete separation. For e#ample if some mo&ement began and then
stopped after ha&ing made some progress then one should go back
and mo&e e&en harder once again in the same direction.
)n order to practice separation techni2ues lie do(n (ith the eyes
closed and attempt all of them o&er the course of se&eral minutes.
4eparation has likely been accomplished if no muscles t(itch or
strain and a sensation of mo&ement occurs. There (ill be a strong
almost physically palpable internal effort to perform a mo&ement.
'aturally no physical mo&ement actually occurs and the practitioner
remains prone and immobileJ ho(e&er at the right moment these
actions (ill lead to an easy entrance into the phase.
Interesting Fact!
%ppro#i$ately 17 to 87 of the ti$e that the
phase is practiced, one reali*es i$$ediately upon
a&a+ening that one has already separated( This
$eans that one $ay already go so$e&here and
stand, lie do&n, sit do&n, etc( This is not ho&ever
"eco$ing conscious in a drea$, "ut an actually
a&a+ening(
#7E BES# #I,E #O P9AC#ICE
The key to practice is the 2uantity and 2uality of attempts made
that hone a practitionerDs skills. There are se&eral (indo(s of time
best suited for employing indirect techni2ues.
To begin it should be stated that sleep follo(s a cyclical pattern.
.e a(aken e&ery hour"and"a"half and then 2uickly fall asleep again
(hich gi&es rise to sleep cycles. Furthermore (e e#perience t(o
primary stages of sleep- rapid eye mo&ement FREMG sleep and non"
rapid eye mo&ement F'REMG sleep. 'REM sleep includes many
internal stages. The more (e sleep the less the body needs deep
'REM sleep and the more time (e spend in REM sleep. Phase
entrance is most likely to occur during REM sleep.

The best (ay to implement indirect techni2ues is by the deferred
$ethod. The aim of the method is to interrupt a sleep cycle during its
final stage and then disrupt it again after falling back to sleep (hich
makes sleep light during the rest of the sleep cycle. 4leep
accompanied by fre2uent interruptions can be put to producti&e uses.
For e#ample if a practitioner FletDs call him CackG goes to sleep at
midnight then Cack should set an alarm for < oDclock in the morning.
Upon a(akening Cack should engage in some sort of physical
acti&ity like going to the bathroom getting a drink of (ater or
reading a fe( pages of this book. 1fter(ard Cack should go back to
bed thinking about ho( (ithin the ne#t t(o to four hours he (ill
(ake up multiple times and make an attempt to enter the phase
during each a(akening.
)f Cack goes to bed earlier then his alarm clock should be set back
by that amount of time since si# hours of initial sleep is the optimal
length of time. )f Cack sleeps less than si# hours then the second half
of his nightDs sleep (ill be too deep. )f Cack sleeps longer than si#
hours then there (ill be little time remaining for attempts or Cack
may not e&en be able to fall asleep.
)f a practitioner naturally (akes up in a forceful manner it (ill be
difficult to regain sleep. Thus it (ill not be necessary for the
practitioner to get out of bed (ith the aid of an alarm. The
practitioner should attempt to go right back to sleep.
'aturally the deferred method is most applicable in cases (here
it is possible to sleep as long as a practitioner desires (ithout ha&ing
to (ake up early. 'ot e&eryone en%oys such lu#ury on a daily basis
but nearly e&eryone has days off (hen time may be set aside to
practice the deferred method. -t is in large $easure due to the
deferred $ethod that classroo$ courses at the School of Out-of-Body
Travel allo& up to 298 of class participants to enter the phase in the
course of a single &ee+end,
The second most effecti&e (indo( of time for entering the phase
is ordinary $orning a&a+ening( This generally occurs during light
slumber follo(ing a full nightDs sleep.
1nother effecti&e time to practice indirect techni2ues is after
a(akening from a daytime nap. Once again this type of sleep (ill be
light and short (hich pro&ides the body needed rest (hile allo(ing
memory and intention to be kept intact through the moment of
a(akening. 1gain not e&eryone has the lu#ury of taking daytime
naps but if such a chance arises then it (ould be &ery beneficial to
take ad&antage of the opportunity.
/ightti$e a&a+enings are the least effecti&e times for phase
e#perimentation because the brain still re2uires a lot of deep sleep at
this time. 1(akening at night the mind is 2uite (eak and hardly
capable of any effort. E&en if some results are obser&ed a(akening
often ends (ith 2uickly falling back asleep. This is not to say that
normal practice of the phase cannot occur at nightJ it %ust (onDt be as
effecti&e as at other times. The nighttime option is best for those (ho
lack an opportunity to use other (indo(s of time for practicing the
phase.
Understand that (e a(aken at night e&ery @A minutes (hich is
(hy a minimum of four a(akenings is almost guaranteed (hen
sleeping e&en for %ust si# hours. .hen the practitioner kno(s about
this and stri&es to sei=e those moments (ith time he (ill actually
sei=e them and take ad&antage of them.
CO+SCIO4S A)A=E+I+G
:onscious a&a+ening is (aking up (ith a particular thought in
mindJ ideally a thought about indirect techni2ues. )n order to start
using indirect techni2ues upon a(akening it is not sufficient to ha&e
a cursory kno(ledge of the techni2ues to be used (hen (aking. 7ue
to the peculiarities of the human mind and its habits it is not al(ays
easy (hen (aking to recall any particular moti&e or idea. The goal of
conscious a(akening is to practice instant action (ithout being idle
after (aking up.
Interesting Fact!
There e#ists a "elief that the pheno$enon of out-
of-"ody travel is practically unattaina"le, and is
accessi"le only to an elect fe& through practices
that re4uire secret +no&ledge( 0o&ever, the
greatest difficulty &hen trying to e#perience out-of-
"ody travel in a short period of ti$e lies only in
i$$ediately re$e$"ering a"out the techni4ues
upon a&a+ening &ithout $oving( This is all si$ple
and straightfor&ard( But it is precisely this trifle
that is the largest stu$"ling "loc+ &hen trying to
e#perience such an unco$$on pheno$enon(
This is not difficult at all for appro#imately +;K of the
population. 6o(e&er for the other three"2uarters of the population
this is an difficult barrier to entry that can e&en seem insurmountable.
)f such thoughts arise one should simply understand that this cannot
be so and that persistent attempts and training are the key solution.
The reasons (hy people are unable to remember practicing the
phase upon a(akening are- not being in the habit of immediately
doing anything upon a(akening a desire to sleep longer a desire to
go to the bathroom being thirsty a desire to suddenly start sol&ing
day"to"day problems and so on.
,onscious a(akening (ith the intent of attempting an indirect
techni2ue should be a practitionerDs primary goal (hich should be
pursued at e&ery cost. The speed at (hich the phase is learned and
e#perienced depends on this.
There are se&eral effecti&e tricks to learning conscious
a(akening-
-ntention upon falling asleep' This is the &ery important to
successfully achie&ing conscious a(akening. 1 &ery clear scientific
fact has been pro&en by somnologists Fscientists (ho study sleepG-
upon a(akening people usually think about (hat they had been
thinking about before falling asleep. This phenomenon is easy to
obser&e if the sleeper is e#perience a serious life problemJ they fall
asleep (ith the problem and (ake (ith it. 4o in a case like this if
difficulties at the front of the mind are replaced (ith a desire to
practice the phase this (ill produce the desired effect. )t is not
necessary to think solely about conscious a(akening (hile falling
asleep. )t is sufficient to simply affirm the intention clearly and
distinctly e&en state the intention out loud. Practicing these types of
conscious actions (hile entering sleep (ill do much to promote the
success of indirect techni2ues upon a(akening.
;eneral intent' The more clearly a practitioner concentrates on the
importance and necessity of (aking up and immediately
remembering to practice the techni2ues the more solid the intent (ill
become and the more likely the process (ill fulfill its role and
actually lead to results.
%ffir$ing desires' 4ometimes an internal intention is simply not
enough for some people or they are unable to properly affirm one by
&irtue of indi&idual characteristics. )n this case an affirmation of
desires should be introduced at the physical le&el. This could be in
the form of a note (ith a description of a goal placed ne#t to the bed
under oneDs pillo( or hung on the (all. )t could be a con&ersation
(ith friends or family about the particular desire or by repeatedly
&ocali=ing the actions that need to be performed upon a(akening. )t
could e&en be an entry in a diary blog or te#ting on a mobile phone.
%naly*ing unsuccessful a&a+enings( 1naly=ing unsuccessful
attempts at conscious a(akening is e#tremely important. .hen
remembering the failed attempt after se&eral minutes se&eral hours
or e&en later in the day focus on it and resol&e to succeed during the
ne#t attempt. 7eep e#ploration of the failure is highly effecti&e and
practical since the practitioner is learning (hat (orks (hat doesnDt
(ork and making healthy resolutions to(ard success.
:reating $otivation' The greater the desire to enter into the phase
to accomplish a goal there the 2uicker successful conscious
a(akening is achie&ed. Moti&ation is be created by a great desire to
do or e#perience something in the phase. )n general pre&ious &isits to
the phase are great moti&ation but an uninitiated person does not
kno( it and (ill need something to (hich they can relate. For some
this could be a childhood dream of flying to Mars for others it could
be the opportunity to see a lo&ed one (ho has passed a(ay for
another it could be the chance to obtain specific information or
influence the course of a physical illness and so forth.
1side from natural methods to achie&e conscious a(aking there
are &arious de&ices and tools that facilitate a measure of success.
These (ill be co&ered in ,hapter ; in the section describing non"
autonomous (ays of entering the phase.
The "est $o$ent for conscious a&a+ening is &hile e#iting a
drea$( This is the $ost effective and productive ti$e to atte$pt
separation or perfor$ing the techni4ues( 1t this moment physical
a(areness of the body is at a minimum. 1(areness at the &ery end of
a dream often occurs after nightmares painful e#periences in the
dream falling dreams I any dream that causes a sudden a(akening.
.ith time one should de&elop a refle# that enables one to
perform planned actions at the moment of a(akening but (hen
consciousness itself has not yet had time to return. This type of refle#
is highly beneficial to sei=ing the most fruitful of opportunities to
enter the phase.
7ue to &arious psychological and physiological factors it is not
possible for e&ery person to achie&e conscious a(akening after e&ery
sleep cycle. Thus there is no point in becoming upset if conscious
a(akening does not occur e&ery time. E#periencing only + to 8
a(akenings per day is normalJ this is sufficient enough to attempt
phase entrance + to ; times per (eek (hen practiced daily.
)t is not (orth getting carried a(ay (ith an e#cessi&e number of
attempts. 7uring the 4choolDs courses it has been noted that doing 1A
conscious a(akenings or more Fsome students try +A or e&en 8AG o&er
the course of one night and morning rarely yields results. This is due
to the fact that if one sets oneself a goal that is desired so much that
its reali=ation breaks the natural rhythms of the body one depri&es
oneself of the intermediate transitional states that make the phase
effecti&e. 1 practitioner may also 2uickly become emotionally
e#hausted from the large number of attempts and be unable to push
limits in the right direction. The upside is that one (ill simply tire
out. )f that starts to happen it is better to calm do(n and try to
approach the matter in a more rela#ed manner e&enly and gradually.
A)A=E+I+G )I#7O4# ,O?I+G
1longside remembering the phase immediately upon (aking
another important re2uirement is a(akening (ithout mo&ing (hich
is difficult since many people (ake up and mo&e. Upon a(akening
scratching stretching opening the eyes and listening to real sounds
should be a&oided. 1ny real mo&ement or perception (ill &ery
2uickly disintegrate the intermediate state and introduce reality the
acti&ation of the mind and its connection to the sensory organs.
1t first a(akening (ithout mo&ing seems difficult or e&en
impossible. 6o(e&er it has been pro&en that this is remedied for
through acti&e attempts and the desire to achie&e set goals. People
often claim that they cannot a(aken (ithout mo&ing that itDs an
impossible e#perience. 6o(e&er after se&eral attempts it (ill
happen and it (ill occur more and more fre2uently (ith practice.
Thus if there is difficulty in a(akening (ithout mo&ement do
not despair %ust keep trying. 4ooner or later the body (ill yield to
the practice and e&erything (ill happen smoothly.
1(akening (ithout mo&ing is &ery important because for the
ma%ority of people e#periments (ith the phase are not possible
e#cept in the first (aking moments (here (aking (ithout mo&ing
sets the stage for successful indirect techni2ue cycles. Often a
practitioner (ill make 1A unsuccessful attempts and mo&e (hile
a(akening. Once the practitioner learns to consistently (ake calmly
and gradually success 2uickly follo(s.
6o(e&er if an a(akening is conscious but (ith mo&ement that
does not mean that the practitioner cannot immediately make an
attempt to fall into the phase. 4uch attempts although they (ill be
about ; times less effecti&e than usual should ne&ertheless be made
1ny opportunity to practice (hile (aking should not be (asted. )t
must only be kept in mind that one must first neutrali=e the effects of
the mo&ement in order to once again fall into an intermediate state. )n
the case of mo&ement it is e#tremely helpful to begin practice (ith
forced falling asleep. 0istening in also (orks (ell as does obser&ing
images and phantom (iggling each performed passi&ely for ;"1;
seconds instead of the standard duration of 8 to ; seconds. 1fter
performing these cycling may begin.
1(akening (ithout mo&ement despite all its importance is not a
goal in and of itself and also not (orth suffering o&er. .hen
a(akening if there is great discomfort something itches a need to
s(allo( arises or any manner of natural refle# it is better to deal
(ith it and then act according to practices recommended (hen
mo&ement upon a(akening happens.
'ot all mo&ements upon a(akening are real and if only for this
reason alone (hen mo&ement occurs indirect techni2ues should
follo(.

Interesting Fact!
<p to 27 of sensations and actions that happen
upon a&a+ening are not real as they see$, "ut are
phanto$(

False sensations occur in (idely di&erse (ays. People often do not
understand (hat is going on (ith them (ithout ha&ing e#perienced
the phase. For e#ample a person may think they are scratching their
ear (ith their physical hand (hen they are really using a phantom
hand. 1 person may hear pseudo"sounds in the room on the street or
at the neighborDs (ithout noting anything unusual. Or a person may
look around the room (ithout kno(ing that their eyes are actually
closed. )f a practitioner recogni=es such moments for (hat they are
they may immediately try to separate from the body.
C8C;ES O2 I+&I9EC# #EC7+I<4ES
Thus far indirect techni2ues used for phase entrance and
techni2ues for separation in the phase ha&e been co&ered. ,onscious
a(akening and the best times to practice it ha&e also been e#amined.
'o( a specific algorithm of action for indirect techni2ues (ill be
presented. Follo(ing this algorithm promises 2uick and practical
results.
1lgorithm of 1ction upon 1(akening-
D #esting Separation #echni$ues 6ithin * Seconds
0ike the pre&ious obser&ation of separation techni2ues a third of
successful attempts (ith indirect techni2ues yield immediate success
upon the attempt of a separation techni2ue due to the fact that the
first seconds after (aking up are the most useful for entering the
phase. The less time that has elapsed after a(akening the better.
,on&ersely if one lies do(n e#pecting something to happen chances
2uickly dissipate.
Thus upon a(akening preferably (ithout first mo&ing a
practitioner should immediately try &arious separation techni2ues
like rolling out getting up or le&itation. )f a techni2ue suddenly
started to yield results for appro#imately for ; seconds then
separation from the body should be attempted. 4ometimes inertia
difficulty or a barrier (ill arise during a separation attempt. 'o
attention should be gi&en to these problems. )nstead resol&e to
separate " decidedly and aggressi&ely climb out of the body.
Beep in mind that trying to immediately separate upon a(akening
is a skill of the utmost importanceJ one that is (orth honing from the
&ery beginning ne&er forgotten.
"D #he Cycle of Indirect #echni$ues to 4se if One is 4nable to
Separate
)f separation does not occur after se&eral seconds it most likely
means that separation (ill not occur regardless of elapsed time in
effort. This is (here the practitioner must resort to other techni2ues.
The practitioner should already ha&e chosen a minimum of three
primary or secondary techni2ues that suit a practical repertoire. 6ere
is (here the techni2ues are put into action.
/ota Bene, -n order to give a specific e#a$ple, &e &ill e#a$ine
the use of three specific techni4ues, &hich should "e replaced &ith a
tested and chosen set of techni4ues( The follo(ing operational
techni2ues ha&e been used as e#amples- obser&ing images FaG
phantom (iggling FbG and listening in FcG.
1fter an unsuccessful attempt at separating the practitioner
immediately starts obser&ing the &oid behind the eyes. )f images
begin to appear (ithin 8 to ; seconds obser&ation should continue
(ithout scrutini=ing the images in detail or the image (ill e&aporate.
1s a result of this action the image (ill 2uickly become more and
more realistic and colorful engulfing the practitioner. )f e&erything
comes together correctly a sudden translocation into the picture (ill
occur or (hen the picture becomes &ery realistic attempt to separate
from the body. )f nothing happens after 8 to ; seconds then the
practitioner should transition to the techni2ue of phantom (iggling.
For 8 to ; seconds the practitioner 2uickly searches the entire
body for a part that can be (iggled. Or the entire period of time is
spent in an attempt to (iggle a specific body part- a finger hand or
leg. )f the desired effect occurs then the practitioner should continue
(ith the techni2ue and achie&e the ma#imum possible range of
mo&ement. 7uring this process a number of things can happen
including spontaneous separation a successful separation attempt
free mo&ement of the (iggled part or the presence of sound or
&ibrations. 1ll of these e&ents are of great ad&antage. )f nothing
(iggles o&er the course of 8 to ; seconds then the practitioner should
mo&e on to listening in.
The practitioner should try to detect an internal sound. )f the
sound is there listen and try to amplify it. 1s a result the noise may
gro( into a roar and spontaneous separation (ill occur separating
through the use of a techni2ue (ill be possible or &ibrations (ill
occur. )f no noise occurs o&er the course of 8 to ; seconds then the
entire cycle should be repeated.
)t is beneficial to e#amine the reason behind the use of a set of
three indirect techni2ues. This is moti&ated by the fact that the body
often reacts to techni2ues in &ery peculiar (ays. .ith one person a
techni2ue may (ork one day and not (ork on another day (hich is
(hy if only one techni2ue is used e&en a &ery good techni2ue that
(orks often a practitioner can miss out on a lot of different
e#perience through the lack of &ariety in practice. Thus a practical
repertoire should consist of se&eral techni2ues.
Interesting Fact!
So$eti$es, the first techni4ue that &or+s for a
practitioner never results in a repeat of phase
entrance again, although other techni4ues that
&ere not i$$ediately effective at the novice stages
of practice later "egin to &or+ regularly and
successfully(
%D 9epeating the Cycle of Indirect #echni$ues
)f the first cycle of 8 techni2ues does not yield any clear results
this does not mean that all is lost. E&en if the techni2ues do not (ork
they still dra( the practitioner closer to the phase state and it is
simply necessary to continue using the techni2ues by again obser&ing
pictures phantom (iggling and listening in I and repeating this
process at least three times.
6a&ing performed one cycle of techni2ues one can easily go on
to doing a second cycle a third one a fourth one and so on. )t is
2uite probable that during one of these cycles a techni2ue (ill
suddenly pro&e itself e&en though it had not been (orking at all %ust
a fe( seconds beforehand.
1 serious practitioner should commit to a minimum of : cycles.
The problem lies in the fact that it is psychologically difficult to do
something that has sho(n itself not to (ork and one may gi&e up
taking further action e&en though one could be at the cusp of falling
into the phase. Beep trying and then try again and againH There ha&e
been cases (here it took t(enty cycles to produce results. 1
monumental effort yes but one (orth the outcome.
'D 2alling Asleep 6ith the Possibility of #rying AgainD
)f a practitioner is unable to enter the phase after performing
cycles and attempts to separate or e&en if e&erything (orked out it
is still better to go back to sleep to facilitate subse2uent attempts.
1gain it is &ery important to go to sleep (ith a clearly defined
intention of actually performing the cycles upon a(akening. 4uch
intention &astly increases the probability that the ne#t attempt (ill
occur soon. That is one should not fall asleep (ith an empty head
and the desire to simply get a good nightDs sleep. )f using the deferred
method then clear intention is mandatory as se&eral attempts are
possible o&er the course of a sleep cycle.
E&en if only a fe( attempts are made accompanied by decided and
concentrated effort then the four steps described in the algorithm (ill
undoubtedly produce entrance into the phase.
)n order to more effecti&ely use the system of indirect cycles it is
necessary to discuss (hat to do if one techni2ue (orks and progress
ceases during the cycle and phase entry does not occur.
First understand that if a techni2ue has begun to (ork only lack
of e#perience and skill (ill pre&ent the phase.
4econd barriers are o&ercome by temporarily s(itching to other
techni2ues. 0et us suppose that noise arising (hen listening in gro(s
louder and louder and then peaks in &olume. )t (ould surely be
beneficial to s(itch to forced falling asleep or obser&ing images for
se&eral seconds and then return to listening in. The sound may then
become much louder and pro&ide an opportunity to proceed (ith the
techni2ue. 4ometimes it makes sense to break off se&eral times into
&arious techni2ues and then return to the primary techni2ue that
yielded some results.
)t is often possible to simultaneously perform t(o or e&en three
techni2ues and e#perience no negati&e effect to results. )t is also
normal and natural to skip around from techni2ue to techni2ue
de&iating from a specific plan of action. For e#ample sounds often
arise during phantom (iggling. )n this case a practitioner may %ust
simply s(itch o&er to listening in. Other oft"encountered results
pairings are- images from sound sound from rotation sound from
straining the brain a strain on the brain from listening in &ibrations
from rotation &ibrations from phantom (iggling and so forth.
3uring initial atte$pts at using cycles of indirect techni4ues, the
pro"le$ of confusion during a critical $o$ent $ay arise, &hen a
novice practitioner suddenly forgets e#actly &hat to do and ho& to
do it( This is nor$al, and the solution is to i$$ediately do &hatever
co$es to $ind( Results can "e achieved in this $anner( 5hen a
practitioner is $ore rela#ed a"out the practice, such pro"le$s &ill
no longer occur(
7I+#S 29O, #7E ,I+&
9aried cycles of indirect techni2ues is an almost mandatory
precondition for getting the best result. There are some e#ceptions.
4ometimes through indirect indicators a practitioner may be
inclined to begin (ith certain techni2ues regardless of (hat had been
planned. These are a sort of hint from the body and the ability to use
such cues plays an e#tremely important role in the use of indirect
techni2ues because they enable a practitioner to substantially increase
the effecti&eness of practice.
7int +oD C I(ages
)f the practitioner becomes a(are upon a(akening that some
images pictures or remnants from dreams are before him then he
should immediately proceed to the techni2ue of obser&ing images
(ith all of the results that arise from it. )f this does not lead to
anything then cycling (ith a set of techni2ues should begin.
7int +oD "C +oises
)f the practitioner reali=es upon a(akening that he hears an
internal noise roaring ringing (histling and so forth then he
should immediately begin from the techni2ue of listening in. )f this
has no effect then cycles of indirect techni2ues ought to commence.

7int +oD %C ?ibrations
)f a practitioner feels &ibrations throughout the body (hile
a(akening they should be amplified through the use of straining the
brain or straining the body (ithout using muscles. .hen the
&ibrations reach their peak the practitioner can try to separate. )f
nothing happens after se&eral attempts indirect techni2ue cycles
should start.

7int +oD 'C +u(bness
)f a practitioner (akes to numbness in a body part phantom
(iggling of that part should be attempted. )f no result is achie&ed
after se&eral attempts cycling should be tried. Of course it is better
to refrain from techni2ues if the numbness is &ery intense and causes
substantial discomfort.
AGG9ESSIO+ A+& PASSI?I#8
7uring the practice of indirect techni2ues including techni2ue
cycles unsuccessful attempts may result in falling asleep or
becoming completely a(ake. These results indicate a deficiency or
e#cess of aggression.
)f a practitioner usually falls asleep (hile attempting to enter the
phase then more aggressi&e action is needed (hile performing
indirect techni2ues. )f on the other hand most attempts end in a full
and alert a(akening then aggression should be curbed and
techni2ues should be conducted more slo(ly and in a more rela#ed
manner. 5alance bet(een passi&ity and aggression is imperati&eJ the
phase state is easily attained by those practitioners (ho find a stable
medium bet(een passi&ity and aggression.
The issue of aggression re2uires a closer e#amination. =uite
often, atte$pts at indirect techni4ues are $ade leisurely, &ithout
desire or real effort, to >chec+ the$ off the list?( Results $ore easily
reali*ed if the practitioner possesses an aggressive desire to enter the
phase( More often than not, practitioners lac+ aggressive desire,
instead of having too $uch of it( Thus, each effort re4uires a distinct
&ant to succeed(
S#9A#EG8 2O9 AC#IO+
4ome mistakenly belie&e that indirect techni2ues (ill produce
2uick easy results like a pill. 7espite the fact that the techni2ues
described in this guidebook are the best means to entering the phase
strong effort still needs to be e#erted. This is not important for some
as e&erything comes 2uite easily to them but for others this is of
great importance.
)ndirect techni2ues (ill definitely (ork if practiced consistently
and as described. )t has already been noted that in the ma%ority of
cases making se&eral concentrated attempts upon a(akening (ithout
mo&ement is sufficient enough to produce results. )t may take a lot of
time and effort to achie&e phase entrance so practitioners (ho set
goals and (ork diligently (ill be presented (ith a cro(n of success.
1ttempts are important in large measure not only for the final
result but also for the process itself. 7uring practice the practitioner
independently learns and sol&es issues that may not ha&e been
understood in the guidebook. Other times the practitioner (ill
encounter situations that ha&e ne&er been described at all. )tDs
impossible to prepare a student for e&ery possible scenario so as a
practitioner mo&es deeper into practice a uni2ue indi&idual
perspecti&e and portfolio of e#periences de&elops (hich (ill
certainly pro&e useful in the future. Until then diligent practice of the
information presented in this book (ill ready a practitioner for that
personal frontier.
1ctions in practice re2uire strict attention. 4tudy the techni2ues
and selects those that (ork best. 4et the goal of consistent conscious
(aking (ithout mo&ement. Make an ob%ecti&e of performing cycles
of indirect techni2ues (hile (aking up day in and day out. 5ith
such a clear course of action, the practitioner should never defocus
his attention or dissipate his energy on other related actions, li+e, for
e#a$ple, on direct techni4ues for entering the phase( )f the indirect
techni2ues do not (ork in the course of se&eral days continue trying.
The latest results occur in a matter of (eeks not months or years
like some sources maintain. 3oals are meant to be stubbornly
pursued step"by"step firmly and diligently.
)f no results occur after 1A to +A days it is better to cease practice
for a (eek and take a rest and then return (ith a fresh resol&e to
master the practice. )nterestingly enough it is e#actly during such a
break that spontaneous entrances into the phase through the most
di&erse methods occur.
)f success is still elusi&e e&en after 1 to + months of trying then a
thorough analysis of the regimen should be conducted to root out any
ob&ious mistakes or deficiencies. )f o&ercoming them pro&es difficult
or impossible s(itching o&er to direct techni2ues is not
recommended since they pro&e much more difficult than indirect
techni2ues. )nstead techni2ues for entering the phase through
conscious dreaming should be practiced.
)t is also not (orth skipping o&er problematic areas and trying to
make up for mistakes by e#pending e&en more effort. For e#ample
ignoring the precondition of a(akening (ithout mo&ing (ill pro&e
fruitless. 5ypassing this re2uirement (orks for &ery fe( people.
Facing e&ery problem head"on and (orking hard to break through
(ill be richly re(arded (ith an unforgettable treasured e#periences.
Beep tryingH
#8PICA; ,IS#A=ES
)I#7 I+&I9EC# #EC7+I<4ES
)nternal certainty that nothing (ill happen instead of belie&ing in
positi&e results.
4topping the performance of techni2ues after an unsuccessful
cycle (hen a minimum of four cycles should be practiced.
,onstantly a(akening to mo&ement instead of remaining still.
Performing direct techni2ues in the e&ening. Total concentration
on indirect techni2ues is re2uired from the morning on if a
practitionerDs goal is access to the phase.
Performing indirect techni2ues for an e#tremely long period of
time F+ minutes or moreG. This is a complete (aste of time in most
cases.
4(itching from techni2ues that ha&e begun to (ork (hen
practice should be follo(ed through to the end.
Passi&ely performing techni2ues instead of being determined and
aggressi&e.
Performing each techni2ue separately for too long a period of
time e&en if the techni2ue does not (ork instead of s(itching to
another techni2ue (ithin se&eral seconds.
E#cessi&e thinking and analysis (hile performing indirect
techni2ues (hich re2uire mental tran2uility and inner stillness.
4topping and concentrating on unusual sensations (hen they
arise &ersus continuing the techni2ue that brought them about in the
first place.
E#tremely long anticipation upon a(akening instead of
immediately performing techni2ues.
Premature attempts at separating instead of performing phase
creation techni2ues through to the end of progress.
6olding the breath (hen unusual sensations appear. 5e calm
instead.
Opening the eyes (hen the only recommended mo&ement is
breathing or mo&ing the eyes behind closed lids.
5eing agitated instead of rela#ed.
,easing attempts to separate e&en (hen partial success is met.
4training the physical muscles (hile performing the techni2ues
&ersus remaining physically motionless.
'ot practicing after an alert a(akening (hen techni2ues are best
applied " especially in the e&ent of (aking (ithout mo&ement.
Merely imagining the techni2ues instead of really understanding
them and performing them if of course one is not performing
rotation or other imagined techni2ues.
4imply (iggling phantom limbs instead of employing a fi#ed
determination to increase the range of mo&ement
Falling right asleep during forced falling asleep instead of ha&ing
the firm intention of continuing efforts (ithin only ; to 1A seconds.
4crutini=ing the details of images (hen using the techni2ue of
obser&ing imagesJ the (hole image should be obser&ed
panoramically lest it disappear.
)ntentionally trying to force pictures (hen obser&ing images
instead of looking for (hat is naturally presented.
4imply hearing noise (hen employing the techni2ue of listening
in instead of attenti&ely trying to pay attention catch something and
listen in.
E-ercises for Chapter "
<uestions
1. .hy are indirect techni2ues the easiest/
+. .hy (ill one techni2ue (ork for some people and not for
others/
8. 6o( many attempts are necessary in order to enter the phase/
:. .hen obser&ing images should a picture be con%ured/
;. 6o( is phantom (iggling different from imagined
mo&ement/
<. .here does sound come from (hile listening in/
>. 6o( is forced listening in different from normal listening in/
?. .hen employing the techni2ue of rotation should one try to
rotate or simply imagine the rotation/
@. .hat is physically strained (hen using the techni2ue of
straining the brain/
1A. 6o( is straining the brain different from straining the body
(ithout using muscles/
11. 4hould a practitioner fall asleep (hen using the forced falling
asleep techni2ue/
1+. 1ccording to statistics from classes held at the 4chool of Out"
of"5ody Tra&el (hich indirect techni2ues are the most effecti&e/
18. .hy should one practice all of the primary techni2ues in a
rela#ed state/
1:. .hat helps practitioners to enter the phase one"third of the
time (hile using indirect techni2ues/
1;. )s le&itation the most popular separation techni2ue/
1<. .hat is the essential difference bet(een indirect techni2ues
and separation techni2ues/
1>. 6o( does the separation techni2ue of rolling out differ from
the indirect techni2ue of rotation/
1?. )s it necessary to imagine anything (hile trying to separate/
1@. .hen is the best time to use indirect techni2ues/
+A. ,an techni2ues that are traditionally used upon a(akening be
attempted during the day/ 6o( effecti&e are these techni2ues
during the day/
+1. )s becoming consciousness (hile dreaming the same as
conscious a(akening/
++. .hen employing indirect techni2ues does an inability to
a(aken (ithout mo&ing ha&e an effect on oneEs practice/
+8. .hat are the components of the algorithm of cycling indirect
techni2ues/
+:. .hat first step must be taken (hile cycling through indirect
techni2ues/
+;. 6o( many different techni2ues should a cycle consist of/
+<. .hat is the minimum number of cycles that must be
practiced/
+>. )f a lot of time has passed after a(akening is this good or bad
for cycles of indirect techni2ues/
+?. .hat must be done if a techni2ue gets stuck at an
unsatisfactory le&el of results/
+@. )f the cycles do not (ork (hat should be done/
8A. .hat are hints from the mind/
81. )n (hat cases is it necessary to introduce aggressi&e effort
(hen performing indirect techni2ues/
#asks
1. Try all of the primary indirect techni2ues (hile in a rela#ed
state and single out 8 to ; techni2ues that seem to (ork. Repeat
such training another couple of times on other days.
+. Try all of the separation techni2ues in a rela#ed state.
8. 1chie&e one conscious a(akening follo(ed by cycles of
indirect techni2ues.
:. 1chie&e one conscious a(akening (ithout any physical
mo&ement and attempt an indirect techni2ue.
;. Upon a(akening (ithout mo&ing perform a full cycle of
indirect techni2ues and repeat this e#ercise until phase entrance
is achie&ed.
Chapter % ! &irect #echni$ues
#7E CO+CEP# O2 &I9EC# #EC7+I<4ES
3irect techni4ues for entering into an out-of-"ody e#perience are
used &ithout the prere4uisite of sleep@ "y perfor$ing specific actions
&hile lying do&n &ith the eyes closed( The ad&antage of direct
techni2ues is that in theory they can be performed at any moment.
6o(e&er a large dra(back e#ists in the length of time it takes to
master the techni2ues. Only ;AK of practitioners achie&e success
after making daily attempts o&er a period of 8 to < (eeks. For some
an entire year may pass before results are reali=ed. The difficulty in
achie&ing results (ith direct techni2ues is not a problem of
inaccessibility but the natural psychological characteristics of the
indi&idual. 'ot e&eryone is able to clearly understand the specific
nuances in&ol&ed (hich is (hy some (ill continually make
mistakes.
Many practitioners stri&e to master direct techni2ues right a(ay
because they appear to be the most con&enient straightfor(ard and
concrete techni2ues. 6o(e&er it is a gra&e mistake to begin
attempting and mastering phase entrance from this le&el. )n @AK of
cases (here no&ices begin their training (ith direct techni2ues
failure is guaranteed. Moreo&er a &ast amount of time effort and
emotion (ill be (asted. 1s a result complete disillusionment (ith
the entire sub%ect of phase e#periences is possible.
3irect techni4ues should only "e practiced after $astery of the
easiest indirect techni4ues or ho& to "eco$e conscious &hen
drea$ing( -n any case, difficulties &ill not &ear one do&n
after&ards, as it &ill "e e#ceedingly clear fro$ oneAs o&n e#perience
that the phase is not a fig$ent of the i$agination( %lso, an advanced
+no&ledge of indirect techni4ues &ill $a+e it considera"ly easier to
achieve direct entry into the phase(
Ouality of the phase e#perience is not dependent upon the chosen
entrance techni2ue. 7irect techni2ues do not necessarily pro&ide a
deeper more lasting phase o&er indirect techni2ues.
7irect techni2ues are better suited for some practitioners and not
others but this ban only be said for a minority of the practicing
population. Mean(hile indirect techni2ues are accessible to
absolutely e&eryone all of the time.
)f a practitioner has decides to begin practice (ith direct
techni2ues or has gained the necessary e#perience (ith indirect
techni2ues the underlying principles of the techni2ues must still be
learned. .ithout these nothing (ill occur e#cept coincidentally and
in rare cases. The key to the successful use of direct techni2ues rests
in achie&ing a free"floating state of consciousness. 6o(e&er (e (ill
first e#amine a large &ariety of &ery useful aspects and factors that
make direct entry into the phase much easier.
First (e (ill e#amine (hen it is best to perform the techni2ues
and ho( intensi&ely to e#ercise their practice. Then (e (ill e#amine
the &ery important factor of body position and the no less crucial
issue of ho( long the techni2ues should be performed. Then (e (ill
briefly in&estigate the issue of rela#ation and then (e (ill
immediately mo&e on to the actual direct techni2ues. Only after
co&ering all of the abo&e are (e able to del&e into the issue of (hat a
free"floating state of consciousness is and ho( to achie&e it.
#7E BES# #I,E #O P9AC#ICE
The issue of time is not important (ith indirect techni2ues since
the ma%or prere2uisite is that they are performed immediately after
a(akening occurs. )n the case of direct techni2ues the issue of
timing is much more critical.
'aturally the best method for finding the right time to perform
direct techni2ues is the same as indirect techni2ues I the deferred
$ethod. 6o(e&er there are some serious differences here. First of
all one may interrupt oneDs sleep at practically anytime of the night
or early morning. 4econd after ha&ing (oken up F;"1; min.G one
should not fall back asleep but should immediately proceed to the
techni2ues.
7irect techni2ues are many times more effecti&e (ith the deferred
method than at any other time. This is due to the fact that (ith the
deferred method the mind does not ha&e time to become 1AAK alert
and it is easy to fall into the altered state of consciousness that (ill
allo( results.
.hen it comes to specific steps one should a(aken in the middle
of the night either on oneEs o(n or (ith the help of an alarm clock.
Then one should get up and do something for 8 to 1A minutes and
then lie do(n again in bed and perform the techni2ues. )f it is
probable that the practitioner (ill (ake up in too alert a state and
thus not e&en be sleepy then the inter&al bet(een a(akening and
performing the direct techni2ue should be shortened and fe(er
things should be done during that period of time. )t should be noted
that (ith this setup a free"floating state of mind plays a far lesser
role that (ith other procedures.
The second most effecti&e (indo( of time is "efore falling asleep
at night (hen the practitioner goes to bed. 7uring this period of
time the brain needs to shut do(n the body and mind in order to
rene( its strength (hich has been e#pended o&er the course of the
day. This natural process can be taken ad&antage of by introducing
certain ad%ustments to it.
1ttempts at performing direct techni2ues during the day are less
effecti&e. 6o(e&er if fatigue has already had a chance to build up by
this time this can be taken ad&antage of because the body (ill try to
fall into sleep. This is especially suited for those (ho are accustomed
to napping during the day.
3enerally other (indo(s of time produce a substantially (orse
result (hich is (hy one should start (ith performing direct
techni2ues in the middle of the night or before a nightEs sleep. Only
after such techni2ues ha&e been mastered (ill it be possible to
e#periment (ith daytime attempts.
I+#E+SI#8 O2 A##E,P#S
The degree of enthusiasm that is de&oted to any pursuit is directly
related to successfully reaching a goal. 6o(e&er it is &ery important
to kno( (hen to ease up especially (ith the delicate matter of phase
entry. One attempt per day using a direct techni2ue is sufficient. )f
more attempts are made the 2uality of each attempt (ill suffer
considerably.
Interesting Fact!
Many approach direct techni4ues as if digging a
ditch' the $ore - the faster and the "etter( The
result' do*ens of atte$pts that yield no fruit(

1 lot of practitioners belie&e that do=ens of attempts o&er the
course of a day (ill yield the phase. This is not the path to success
and (ill 2uickly lead to disillusionment (ith the practice. E&en if
after a (eek or a month no results are seen direct techni2ues should
be attempted only once daily. Persistent analytical and sensible
stubborn resol&e to practice properly (ill produce the desired effect.
&49A#IO+ O2 A+ A##E,P#
)t is useless to attempt entering the phase using a direct
techni2ue by lying in bed and resol&ing neither to sleep nor get up
until the phase occurs. 4uch coarseness in handling delicate nature of
the mind (ill produce nothing besides rapid emotional e#haustion.
Rigid timeframes apply (hile performing direct techni2ues before
a sleep or in the middle of the night. 7irect techni2ues attempts
should only last 1A to +A minutes. 0onger durations inhibit sleepiness
because the mind (ill concentrate too long on the techni2ues and the
desire to fall asleep (ill dissipate resulting in insomnia that often
lasts se&eral hours. O&erdone efforts negati&ely affect natural
enthusiasm due lost sleep and being tired the follo(ing day (hich is
compounded by the reality of a gro(ing number of failed attempts.
)f direct techni2ues produce no effect o&er the course of 1A to +A
minutes before sleep or in the middle of the night then it is better to
go to sleep (ith the thought that e&erything (ill (ork out another
time. This is the positi&e outlook a practitioner ought to al(ays
maintain.
BO&8 POSI#IO+
.ith indirect techni2ues body position isnDt important since
conscious a(akening regardless of body position is the goal.
6o(e&er the position of the body is crucial (hile practicing direct
techni2ues.
There is not an e#act body position that each practitioner should
assume since once again indi&idual characteristics and instincts
differ (idely. There are specific rules that allo( one to select the
right position based on indirect indicators.
Many hold a belief that the correct pose is that of a corpse I lying
on the back (ithout a pillo( legs and arms straightened. This notion
has probably been borro(ed from other practices claiming that it
helps achie&e an altered state of mind. 6o(e&er this position
seriously impairs the efforts of the ma%ority of practitioners. The
corpse pose should only be used (hen it is probable that a
practitioner (ill 2uickly fall asleep (hile performing techni2ues in
this pose e&en though it generally pre&ents sleep.
)f a practitioner e#periences difficulty falling asleep and is
constantly a(ake (hile performing direct techni2ues then the most
comfortable position for the indi&idual should be used.
-f sleep co$es 4uite easily to a practitioner, a less natural
position should "e ta+en( -f a practitioner e#periences fe&er gaps in
consciousness &hen the techni4ues are perfor$ed and has a harder
ti$e falling asleep, a $ore co$forta"le a position should "e used(
7epending on the situation there are many possible positions- lying
do(n on the back on the stomach on the side or e&en in a half"
reclined position. )t is possible that a practitioner (ill ha&e to change
positions from one attempt to another introducing ad%ustments
related to a free"floating state of mind.
9E;AEA#IO+
5y nature one should clearly understand that direct techni2ues
are in and of themsel&es rela#ation methods inasmuch as no phase
can occur (ithout one being rela#ed. 1ccordingly one can go
immediately into the phase (ithout any prior rela#ation.
4ince the most effecti&e (indo( of time for using direct
techni2ues occurs before sleep and at night and lasts only 1A to +A
minutes in any case additional time should not be (asted on trying to
rela# nor should time for rela#ation be subtracted from the re2uisite
1A to +A minutes.
,orrect and 2uality rela#ation is a difficult pursuit and many go
about it indi&idually producing an opposition to natural rela#ation.
For e#ample many endea&or to rela# their bodies to such a degree
that in the end the mind is as acti&e as it (ould be (hile trying to
sol&e a difficult mathematical e2uation. )n this type of situation
entering the phase is impossible.
The body automatically rela#es (hen the mind is rela#ed. The
body in turn (ill ne&er rela# if the mind is acti&e. Therefore it is
better for beginners refrain from the trouble of the nuances of
rela#ation and sa&e their energies for more elementary matters.
)nstead of forcing a technical rela#ation a practitioner should
simply lie do(n for se&eral minutes and this (ill pro&ide the best
rela#ation. 0ying do(n acti&ates natural rela#ation processesJ the
most po(erful kind.
,omplete peaceful rela#ation may only be coerced by those (ith
speciali=ed in"depth e#perience. 3enerally these are people (ho
ha&e spent a great amount of time and effort mastering trance and
meditati&e states. Rela#ation in these cases should take no more than
1 to 8 minutes and no longer as because (hen a practitioner is e#pert
at rela#ation it is sufficient to %ust think about it and it occurs.
1ll 2uality rela#ation techni2ues may (ell ser&e as direct
techni2ues if a free"floating state of mind occurs (hile they are
e#ercised. 1fter gaining the necessary e#perience (ith trance and
meditation a practitioner of these mental arts may proceed to
mastering the phase.
?A9IA#IO+S O2 4SI+G
&I9EC# #EC7+I<4ES
Techni2ues used to gain direct entrance to the phase are e#actly
the same as those used during indirect attempts. The only difference
is in the method of implementation. The techni2ues are described in
detail in ,hapter +. 6o(e&er since direct techni2ues mostly re2uire
passi&ity not all techni2ues (ork e2ually (ell for both direct and
indirect entries into the phase. For e#ample acti&e techni2ues like
straining the brain cannot be used to gain a smooth entrance into the
phase.
7irect techni2ues differ from indirect techni2ues in their
implementation because of the slo( halting production of results that
occurs from the beginning of a direct attempt through the end of it. )f
upon a(akening something happens to (ork then this can practically
al(ays lead to entrance into the phase. For e#ample the same
phantom (iggling before sleep can begin 2uickly enough but range
of mo&ement (ill not be easy to increase and the entire
implementation of the techni2ue (ill rely on protracted rhythmic
mo&ement. Results take much longer- ten minutes instead of ten
seconds. These differences also apply to e&ery techni2ue described in
this guidebook.
0ike the practice of indirect techni2ues to begin the practice of
direct techni2ues a practitioner should choose 8 or : of the most
suitable techni2ues from those that pro&e most effecti&e to the
indi&idual. )n order to assist the practitioner a table has been
pro&ided detailing the documented effecti&eness of the direct
techni2ues-
The primary difference in (orking (ith direct techni2ues is the
time that it takes to e#ercise each. )f testing a specific indirect
techni2ue takes only 8 to ; seconds then in this case se&eral minutes
(ill be spent. 7uration &aries depending on certain factors.
There are three primary (ays of performing the techni2ues-
classical se2uencing and cycling " similar to the cycling used (ith
indirect techni2ues. To understand (hich &ariant should be used
consider the follo(ing table-
?ariations of 4sing the
#echni$ues
)hen to 4se It
:lassical Bpassive) variation'
One attempt of 1 techni2ue.
The techni2ue may be alternated
after each attempt.
" (hen learning direct
techni2uesJ
" (hen a practitioner generally
sleeps poorlyJ
" if attempts lead to (aking upJ
" if attempts (ith other
&ariations occur (ithout lapses in
consciousnessJ
" if the body and consciousness
are in a rela#ed stateJ
#he ,ost Effecti>e &irect #echni$ues at Se(inars of the School
of Out-of-Body #ra>el
Phantom .iggling 1;K
Rotation 1;K
0istening in 1;K
9ibrations Foccurring amid the use of other
techni2uesG
1;K
Obser&ing )mages 1AK
Mi#ture of Techni2ues 1AK
4imple separation Fusually mi#ed in (ith other
techni2uesG
1AK
Other Techni2ues 1AK
Se4uencing B$iddle)'
One attempt (ith + to 8
techni2ues for 1 to ; minutes.
Techni2ues are alternated
infre2uently. 1ggression
fluctuates (ith the length of time
that the techni2ues are
performed.
" used if falling asleep occurs
(hile using the classical
&ariation or if cycling results in
becoming (ide a(akeJ
" (hen a practitioner generally
falls asleep 2uicklyJ
:ycling Bactive)'
1lgorithm of cycling 8
techni2ues like (ith indirect
entry to the phase but
performing each techni2ue for 1A
seconds to 1 minute and not 8 to
; seconds.
" if the classical and se2uencing
&ariations put one asleepJ
" (hen one generally falls
asleep &ery 2uicklyJ
" can also be employed (hen
e#hausted or sleep depri&edJ

1 practitioner should al(ays begin (ith the classical &ariation i.e.
using one techni2ue o&er an entire attempt. 7ue to the unusual nature
of the efforts in&ol&ed a beginnerDs enthusiasm may sustain a
completely alert state. 0ater ho(e&er strong prolonged lapses of
consciousness into sleep may occur. 6ere it may be necessary to
increase the le&el of acti&ity by transitioning to the se2uencing
&ariation.
4e2uencing is the primary &ariation used for direct techni2ues
because of its elasticity in application. )t can be passi&e if o&er the
course of 1; minutes (hen a practitioner alternates t(o techni2ues
for fi&e minutes. )t may also be aggressi&e if used se2uencing three
techni2ues for one minute. E&erything bet(een these t(o e#tremes
allo(s proper practice of the techni2ues and selection of the best
&ariation to achie&e a free"floating state of mind.
)f falling off to sleep stubbornly occurs e&en (ith the acti&e form
of se2uencing then one should start cycling through indirect
techni2ues but performing each techni2ue from 1A seconds to 1
minute.
1s long (ork (ith the techni2ues is implied one should not torment
oneself if one does not (ant to do something other(ise one may
2uickly tire out. E&erything should be a pleasure to do and not cause
any e#cessi&e emotional tension.
#7E 29EE-2;OA#I+G S#A#E O2 ,I+&
There are almost infinite descriptions of direct entry techni2ues
offered in literature stories on the )nternet and at seminars.
4ometimes one description fundamentally differs from another. )n
the ma%ority of cases ho(e&er common threads e#ist that unite
almost e&ery description of a particular techni2ue- short lapses in
consciousness memory gaps and drifting in and out of sleep all of
(hich are hallmarks of the free"floating state of mind. 1fter any of
these phenomena occur all manner of unusual pre"phase or phase
sensations arise.
0apses in consciousness may last for seconds se&eral minutes or
more than an hour. They may range from a simple loss of
consciousness to entrance into a full"fledged dream. They may be
singular and rare or may occur se&eral times o&er the course of a
minute. .hate&er a lapse entails the mind attains a mode of
operating that is ideal for phase e#perimentation pro&ided the
practitioner is able to refrain from deep sleep and 2uickly return to a
conscious (aking state.
'ot e&ery lapse of consciousness leads to the phase. The lapse
must ha&e sufficient depth to be effecti&e. Thus (ith e&ery
unsuccessful lapse another deeper lapse should be incurred.
The primary practical dra(back of the free"floating state of mind
is the possibility of falling completely asleep during lapses instead of
only temporarily dipping into sleep. Techni2ues are definitely
necessary to ensure the desired result. 4uch techni2ues more or less
fulfill an au#iliary function and thus one need not be strict about
them.
Interesting 2actF
-t does not $atter &hich direct techni4ue is used@
as long as it leads to lapses in consciousness,
success is possi"le(

.hen performing the &ariations of the techni2ues a practitioner
can begin to &acillate bet(een full alertness and complete asleep
coming to and then nodding off again.
To a&oid falling asleep re2uires a strong desire to return to
(akefulness. This is accomplished by a strong resol&e on the part of
the practitioner e&en if (hile performing a direct techni2ue drifting
in and out of sleep occurs. The practitioner must firmly assert that at
the moment consciousness tapers off a(akening (ill immediately
occur.
On the other hand if lapses do not occur and are replaced by
complete alertness the follo(ing tricks of the trade may help- full
concentration on mental actions or con&ersely musing and
daydreaming in parallel (ith the techni2ue being used. )t should be
noted that these are only effecti&e at the initial stages of (orking (ith
direct techni2ues since such techni2ues ha&e a strong sleep"inducing
effect.
)f direct techni2ues do not lead to light sleep or singular lapses
after a long period of regular practice then it must be assumed that
the practitioner is dealing (ith some appreciable error in techni2ue or
in the length of performance.
Regulating the number of lapses that occur may be modified by
body position during practice or by changing the &ariation used (hile
performing techni2ues.
Entering the phase (ith a free"floating state of mind most often
occurs as the result of three key factors. First one techni2ue or
another may begin to (ork (ell during a lapse. 4econd nearness to
the phase may une#pectedly manifest itself through sounds or
&ibration after a lapse. 7uring this transitioning to techni2ues that
correspond to the abo&e symptoms Flistening in straining the brainG
may be applied. Third (hen e#iting a lapse it is sometimes easy to
separate or 2uickly find a (orking techni2ue by paying attention to
initial indicators.
0apses in consciousness are not bound to occur in 1AAK of cases.
6o(e&er stri&ing to achie&e lapses plays a &ery important role since
they are not al(ays percei&able and a lapse occurrence is not al(ays
ob&ious. They can be &ery short in duration or shallo(. Or they may
not occur at all. 'onetheless properly applied techni2ues to produce
lapses may gi&e entrance to the phase.
A4EI;IA98 2AC#O9S
Using direct techni2ues in the e&ening or in the middle of the
night take ad&antage of the bodyDs natural state of fatigue and for
practical purposes this natural tiredness may be amplified. For
e#ample direct techni2ues more easily lead to success if the
practitioner is considerably sleep"depri&ed. Moreo&er in such a state
inducing a free"floating state of mind may be forgone. The most
important thing is simply not to fall asleep immediately in addition
to employing the appropriate &ariations (ith the techni2ues. .illful
depri&ation of sleep is torturous and useless e&en though great results
may be achie&ed by an e#perienced and kno(ledgeable practitioner
in a se&erely fatigued state. 5eginners are better off approaching all
forms of practice in a natural balanced (ay.
1n intense longing sleep is not limited to long periods of sleep
depri&ationJ physical and emotional fatigues also play important
roles. )n that case the most important thing is not to fall asleep (hen
performing the techni2ues and thus one must select a more acti&e
techni2ue &ariation than usual.
S#9A#EG8 2O9 AC#IO+
7irect techni2ues seldom produce 2uick and clear results unlike
entering the phase &ia becoming conscious (hile dreaming or
through the use of indirect techni2ues. 1t first direct techni2ues
produce sporadic results (hich is (hy the path of practice should not
begin (ith direct techni2ues hoping for fast results. )t is better to
systematically practice a techni2ue (orking to(ard mastery on a
consistent basis.
There is no cause for (orry if results are achie&ed after a month
of daily attempts. 1 continual effort to analy=e practice and impro&e
should be the primary focus because failures are al(ays caused by
distinguishable mistakes.
1lthough difficulties may arise (ith direct techni2ues one should
ne&er abandon (hat (orked until then Fi.e. indirect techni2uesG as
this could temporarily depri&e one of the e#perience that one has
gained so far.
1 combination of direct and indirect techni2ues should ne&er be
used during the course of a single day since this (ould be detrimental
to practical focus and enthusiasm. )t is better to separately perform
each type of techni2ue on different days. For e#ample direct
techni2ues could be used before falling asleep during the (ork(eek
(hile indirect techni2ues may be practiced during the (eekends
(hen a practitioner has more chances to e#periment using the e#tra
opportunities to sleep.
#8PICA; ,IS#A=ES
)I#7 &I9EC# #EC7+I<4ES
1ssuming an incorrect position (hen lying do(n.
Performing direct techni2ues during the day (hen a practitioner
is ine#perienced instead of in the e&ening or at nightJ
Performing more than one attempt per day.
Performing protracted rela#ation before the techni2ues e&en
(hen this may play a negati&e role.
Performing the techni2ues for too long (hen they should be
e#ercised for no more than +A minutes.
Forgetting to affirm a strong intention of a(akening during a
lapse of consciousness.
0ack of a free"floating state of mind. This is mandatory
Falling asleep during lapses in a free"floating state of mind
instead of (orking to(ard multiple lapses (hile a(akening.
Forgetting separation techni2ues and a(aiting some unkno(n
e&ent upon emergence from a lapse instead of taking ad&antage of
the moment.
E#cessi&ely alternating the techni2ues in a primary repertoire
instead of testing them in a planned and systematic manner.
6olding the breath (hen unusual sensations are encountered.
1l(ays be calm.
6alting practice (hen unusual sensations occur (hen it is
necessary to continue (hat brought about the sensations.
E#cessi&e e#citement (hile performing direct techni2ues.
0ack of aggression during attempts due to fatigue and sleep
depri&ation.
0ack of a clear plan of action. Understanding and planning the
use of distinct &ariations of the techni2ues beforehand is crucial to
the analysis of subse2uent errors in practice.
E-ercises for Chapter %
<uestions
1. .hich techni2ues should be mastered before proceeding to
direct techni2ues/
+. 4hould results from the use of direct techni2ues be e#pected
after se&eral days or a (eek/
8. )s it better to practice direct techni2ues during the day or in
the e&ening/
:. )s it correct to perform three direct attempts per day/
;. .hich body position should be assumed (hen suffering from
insomnia/
<. .hich body position should be used by a person (ho falls
asleep 2uickly/
>. 6o( much time should be spent on a single direct attempt/
?. .hen can direct attempts be made for a longer period of time
than usual/
@. .hat is the best (ay for an ine#perienced practitioner to
rela#/
1A. ,an direct techni2ues substitute rela#ation techni2ues/
11. ,an rela#ation techni2ues substitute direct techni2ues/
1+. 6o( many &ariations for performing direct techni2ues are
there/
18. )n (hat case is the &ariation of se2uencing (ith direct
techni2ues employed/
1:. .hich techni2ue may not be used for direct entrance to the
phase (ith the goal of creating a free"floating state of mind/
1;. .hat happens to consciousness (hile in a free"floating state
during direct techni2ues/
1<. 4hould a(akening be attempted if falling asleep occurred
(hile using direct techni2ues/
1>. .hat is the probability of entering the phase (ithout a free"
floating state of consciousness/
1?. .hat do unsuccessful attempts using direct techni2ues most
often end in/
1@. )s se#ual acti&ity before an e&ening attempt using direct
techni2ue beneficial/
#asks
1. ,hoose the best body position for direct techni2ues based on
your indi&idual preferences.
+. Use the classical &ariation of performing direct techni2ues
until it phase entrance or falling asleep se&eral times.
8. Using a combination of &ariations for direct techni2ues
achie&e a free"floating state of mind.
:. .hen performing direct techni2ues try to achie&e no less
than three lapses in consciousness before +A minutes elapse or
before you fall asleep. Repeat this challenge until phase entrance
is achie&ed.
Chapter ' ! Beco(ing Conscious )hile &rea(ing
#7E CO+CEP# O2 #EC7+I<4ES I+?O;?I+G
BECO,I+G CO+SCIO4S )7I;E &9EA,I+G
The techni2ues for phase entrance &ia becoming conscious (hile
dreaming are based on reaching consciousness and self"a(areness
during a dream (hich regardless of dream 2uality can be
transitioned into a fully reali=ed phase e#perience. ,ontrary to
popular opinion ha&ing an out"of"body e#perience through dreaming
differs little from other techni2uesJ the primary results of (hich may
be persistently categori=ed as dissociati&e e#periences- being fully
conscious (hile remo&ed from the perception of a physical body.
The realism of a phase induced through becoming conscious in a
dream does not differ from phases entered using other techni2ues
and (hen deepened the phase offers more &i&id and lucid
e#periences than those of e&eryday life.
)f a practitioner becomes a(are of a dream (hile in it Fusually
accompanied by a clear reali=ation that it is !%ust a dream$G then the
phase is e#perienced from that moment for(ard.
5eginners often confuse the notion of becoming conscious (hile
dreaming (ith induced dreaming. 1n induced dream is the dream of
a specific topic pro&oked on demandJ this does not presuppose
consciousness. Moreo&er not all practitioners clearly understand
(hat it means to be fully conscious (hile dreaming. ,onsciousness
(hile dreaming is al(ays present to some e#tent but it is necessary
to be as conscious as one (ould be in a (akeful state. 1(areness is
not possible as long as the plot of the dream continues. .hen full
understanding occurs that e&erything around is %ust a dream a person
drops the dream and starts doing only (hat he (ants to do at that
&ery moment. 1nd after a(akening he should not think that (hat
happened (as absurd or une#plainable.
7uring the process of becoming conscious in a dream a
practitionerDs actions must be completely subordinated to the desire
to e#perience a 2uality phase. This is (hy upon becoming conscious
in a dream proceeding to techni2ues related to deepening and
maintaining is crucial.
Techni2ues for becoming conscious in a dream differ &ery much
in nature from other techni2ues and there are good reasons (hy
these methods are differentiated from other practices like so"called
astral pro1ection or out-of-"ody e#perience BOB2). 6o(e&er their
characteristics differ &ery little in terms of results.
The techni2ue"related peculiarities rest in the fact that specific
actions are not re2uired to produce immediate concrete results. 1ll
techni2ue"related elements are performed outside of (hen
consciousness (hile dreaming occurs. This is because it is impossible
to take some action if you are not conscious and do not reali=e that
you are dreaming. 1ll efforts are directed at making that &ery
reali=ation someho( occur.
Interesting Fact!
2ven if a practitioner pays no heed to the
techni4ues for "eco$ing conscious &hile drea$ing,
"ut applies direct or indirect techni4ues, on
average each fifth phase &ill still occur through
"eco$ing conscious in a drea$( This has "een
statistically proven at se$inars of the School of
Out-of-Body Travel(

Many stri&e to achie&e consciousness during each dream o&er the
course of an entire nightJ ho(e&er this is rarely possible due to
physiological barriers. There is a good reason that sleep and dreams
are an important part of a human life. There is an important need to
s(itch off not only body but also consciousness so that it may
unconsciously sift and process the &ast &olume of information
obtained in e&eryday life.
The timeframe for achie&ing conscious dreaming is &ery difficult
to estimate due to the nature of re2uired actions. )ntensity and
intention definitely e#ert hea&y influence. 1 practitioner may become
conscious in a dream (hen first lapsing into sleep regardless of
(hen it occurs. Or (ith regular attempts this could happen in t(o
(eeks to a month. 'e&ertheless these techni2ues promise a much
higher likelihood of success than direct methods and can be
compared (ith indirect techni2ues " inferior to the latter only in terms
of the speed at (hich results are achie&ed and the amount of effort
re2uired. .hile indirect techni2ues yield ma#imum results in light of
a full nightDs rest the amount of time spent in bed is not a significant
factor to achie&ing dream consciousness. Therefore this techni2ue is
sure to guarantee entry into the phase especially if difficulty has
been encountered (hile practicing other techni2ues.
Techni2ues used to attain dream consciousness should not be
combined (ith other types of techni2ues. )t is better to focus on one
thing at a time. -nterestingly, &hen a techni4ue is practiced on a
regular "asis, there is nearly a 17 guarantee that drea$
consciousness &ill spontaneously occur( % practitioner $ust +no&
ho& to react &hen this happens(
#EC7+I<4ES 2O9 BECO,I+G
CO+SCIO4S I+ A &9EA,
)t is possible to simultaneously practice se&eral techni2ues for
becoming conscious in a dream since e&ery techni2ue is directly
compatible and complementary to another.
9e(e(bering &rea(s
There is a (ell kno(n and (idespread of fallacy that supposes
that dreams do not occur for some people. E&eryone dreams but not
e&eryone remembers their dreams. E&en those (ho acti&ely dream
remember only a small fraction of these nightly e#cursions. 6ence
one should not think that it is impossible for someone (ho does not
remember dreams to become conscious in one. 4uch a person should
simply try to use the techni2ues.
1t the same time there is a direct correlation bet(een the number
of dreams remembered and the probability of becoming conscious
(hile dreaming. That is (hy de&eloping the ability to remember
dreams is crucial. )n essence the ability to achie&e dream
consciousness rests (ith the conscious mind (hich is &ery much
interconnected (ith memory"related processes.
,onsciousness is naturally inherent in dreams but it lacks rapid
operati&e memory. 7reamers may kno( (ho they are their names
ho( to (alk and ho( to talk but may not kno( ho( surrounding
e&ents are related or the nature of their significance.
5y increasing the fre2uency of remembered dreams short"term
dream memory becomes more de&eloped (hich enables more
realistic dream e#periences follo(ed by a higher probability of dream
consciousness.
There are three techni2ues dedicated to increasing the number of
remembered dreams.
The first is to simply recall the details of dreams upon a(akening.
.ithin the first fe( minutes of (aking up try to remember as many
dreams from the night before as possible. This should be done (ith a
great amount of attention and diligence because this e#ercise
strengthens the memory. )f possible during the day or better yet
before going to sleep at night recalling the pre&ious nightDs dreams
once again is highly beneficial.
.riting dreams do(n in a special dream %ournal is much more
effecti&e than simple recall. Record dreams in the morning (hile
memories are still fresh. The more details recalled (hen recording
the dream the better the ultimate results. This is a &ery attenti&e
approach that demands a higher a(areness than simple recollection.
.riting dreams in a %ournal significantly increases a(areness of
actions and aspirations.
1nother (ay of remembering dreams is to create a map of the
dream (orld. This is called drea$ cartography and is similar to
keeping a %ournal though an enhanced le&el of a(areness is
de&eloped by connecting dream episodes on a map.
First record one dream describing locations and e&ents (hich are
plotted on the map. This cartographic process is repeated (ith each
subse2uent dream and after se&eral dreams an episode (ill occur that
is someho( related to the location of a dream that has already been
recorded. The t(o dreams that took place near each other are plotted
ne#t to each other on the map. O&er time more and more interrelated
dreams (ill occur and the map (ill become increasingly concentrated
rather than disconnected. 1s a result the fre2uency and realistic
2uality of remembered dreams (ill increase and the dreamer (ill
increase the ability to achie&e consciousness (hile dreaming.
)t is best to set remembered dreams to memory after temporary
a(akenings &ersus (aiting until morning. To accomplish this it
helps to ha&e a pen and a piece of paper nearby so that a practitioner
may 2uickly %ot do(n a phase or se&eral key (ords from the plot of
the dream before falling back asleep. Using this information the
ma%ority of dreams are 2uickly and completely recalled.
The initial result from e#ercising these techni2ues is a rapid
increase in the number of remembered dreams. .hen this number
becomes significant Fany(here bet(een fi&e and 1A per nightG dream
consciousness follo(s on a regular basis.
Intention
)ntention is crucial to the success of any techni2ue. .ith regard to
dream consciousness its significance is multiplied. The creation of
intention is ine#tricably linked to the creation of internal aspiration
(hich has re&erberations in both conscious and unconscious states. )n
reality an ele&ated degree of intention operates as a po(erful method
of mental programming.
This techni2ue is performed before falling asleep by affirming a
strong desire to become conscious (hile dreaming. For best results
alongside a strong clearly defined intention think through (hat
actions (ill be taken (hen dream consciousness is achie&ed.
Creating an Anchor
4ince dream consciousness is not linked to specific actions that
take place (ithin a dream and sensory perception continues to
operate in the dream state it is possible to de&elop and use an
artificially conditioned refle# to achie&e consciousness. The essence
of this techni2ue is to train the consciousness to uniformly react to
certain stimuli that occur (hile being a(ake and (hen dreaming
establishing a habit of specific response e&ery time a certain situation
occurs.
For e#ample (hile a(ake a practitioner may ask !1m )
dreaming/$ e&ery time they see an anchor. 1n anchor is any ob%ect
that is often encountered (hile a(ake and (hile dreaming. E#amples
of anchors include a practitionerDs o(n hands red ob%ects or running
(ater. .hen first using this techni2ue a practitioner (ill be unable to
2uestion (hether a dream is in progress e&ery time a pre"established
anchor is encountered. 6o(e&er (ith training and a strong desire
this techni2ue 2uickly produces results. O&er time subconscious
2uestioning of the practitionerDs state becomes habit happening
(hile a(ake and dreaming. The end result is dream consciousness.
)t is important to note that one needs not only to simply ask this
2uestion but that it is also important to ans(er it mindfully trying to
isolate oneself from surrounding e&ents in order to be able to ans(er
it in an as ob%ecti&e and unpredetermined (ay as possible. Failing to
ans(er ob%ecti&ely (ill al(ays result in a negati&e response FnoG and
dream consciousness (ill not be achie&ed.
+atural Anchors
)n addition to creating deliberate anchors that induce conscious
dreaming natural anchors should be gi&en focused attention. These
are ob%ects and actions that regularly cause dream consciousness
e&en (hen consciousness is not desired. 5eing a(are of the e#istence
of natural anchors actually doubles the chances of their appearance.
The follo(ing e#periences are common natural anchors that are
present in dreams- death sharp pain intense fear stress flying
electric shock se#ual sensations and dreaming about phase entrance
or the phase en&ironment. .hen attempting dream consciousness
identifying natural anchors produces results nearly 1AAK of the time.
One may try to start flying each time that one ans(ers the
2uestion. This is of course pointless (hen in (aking reality.
6o(e&er (hen dreaming this (ill most likely lead to flight and
once again pro&e that e&erything around is %ust a dream.
Self-Analysis
,onsistent analysis of dreams helps to ascertain reasons for an
absence of conscious a(areness- these analyses are significant to
attaining dream consciousness. O&er the course of a lifetime the
mind gro(s accustomed to the parado#ical nature of dreams and pays
less attention to them. This becomes apparent (hile trying to
understand that a red crocodile is unable to talk cannot be red nor
can it rent an apartment. .hile dreaming these impossibilities are
ne&er called into 2uestion. The essence of self"analysis is
remembering dreams and thinking hard about (hy their parado#ical
features had not been ade2uately recogni=ed in the dream state.
.ith e#perience the e&eryday analysis of the correspondence of
dreams to reality begins to ha&e an effect on a practitionerDs
reasoning (ithin the dream state. For e#ample that red crocodileDs
presence in a rented apartment could cause doubts that gi&e pause for
reflection (hich could in turn lead to the understanding that
e&erything happening is %ust a dream.
AC#IO+S #O BE &O+E )7E+ BECO,I+G
CO+SCIO4S )7I;E &9EA,I+G
To ensure that dream consciousness leads to a fully de&eloped
phase e#perience one of three specific actions must be taken.
The best is the techni2ue is deepening (hich should be
immediately applied once dream consciousness occurs. 7eepening
must be performed (ithin the dream episode before all other
techni2ues. 7oing so &irtually guarantees entrance to the phase. The
choice of actions that follo( deepening is dependent upon a
practitionerDs predetermined course of plan in the phase.
.hen becoming conscious (hile dreaming it is 2uite dangerous
to try to return to oneDs body in order to roll out of it right a(ay
unless one has deepened beforehand. This could result in a situation
(here after ha&ing easily returned to oneDs body one (ould not be
able to separate from it as the phase becomes significantly (eaker
(hen physical sensations coincide (ith the position of a real body. )f
one is to employ such an option then in order to return to oneDs body
one should simply think about it (hich is often sufficient to make
the transition occur almost immediately.
1nother option is the use of translocation techni2ues to arri&e at a
desired place (ithin the phase (orld. )t is also dangerous to employ
this &ariation (ithout first deepeningJ translocating in a shallo(
phase makes a return to the (akeful state &ery likely. Translocation is
often accompanied by a substantial decrease in the depth of the phase
state.
S#9A#EG8 2O9 AC#IO+
To achie&e dream consciousness constant practice is highly
necessary because sporadic practice (ill fail to de&elop the re2uisite
background thought processes.
1s a rule employing phase entry techni2ues (ithin the conte#t of
dream consciousness produces results after se&eral (eeks and the
effects of the techni2ues are increasingly pronounced (ith time. )f
there are no results (ithin a month or t(o refrain from these
techni2ues for a period of time take a break for a (eek or t(o and
resol&e to assume a fresh start later.
Practitioners often stop using these techni2ues after initial results
as later effects become elusi&e and the fre2uency of dream
consciousness rapidly declines. These techni2ues should not be
abandoned after first yielding results though a gradual decrease in
practice is generally acceptable.
#8PICA; ,IS#A=ES )7E+ P9AC#ICI+G
BECO,I+G CO+SCIO4S )7I;E &9EA,I+G
Percei&ing the state of dream consciousness as a non"phase state
e&en though this phenomenon is one and the same (ith the phase.
1ttempting dream consciousness (hile performing other phase
entrance techni2ues (hen it is better to focus on dream consciousness
alone.
.hen falling asleep lacking sufficient desire to e#perience
conscious dreaming e&en though this is critical.
,ontinuing to yield to the plot of a dream e&en after achie&ing
dream consciousness (hereas subse2uent actions must be
independent and based on free (ill.
)ncorrectly ans(ering the 2uestion !1m ) dreaming/$ (hile
dreaming.
Forgetting to immediately begin deepening techni2ues (hen
dream consciousness has been achie&ed.
.hen e#ercising memory de&elopment recalling the most &i&id
dreams instead of e&ery dream.
)nconsistent concentration (hile practicing dream consciousness
techni2ues.

E-ercises for Chapter '
<uestions
1. .hat is the difference bet(een an out"of"body e#perience and
dream consciousness/
+. 1fter attaining dream consciousness does the realistic 2uality
of the surroundings differ from that of (akefulness/
8. .hich techni2ue can be used in a dream to become conscious
in it/
:. )s it possible to achie&e dream consciousness after the first
attempt/
;. )s it true that not all people dream/
<. .hy is learning to remember as many dreams as possible
important for becoming conscious (hile dreaming/
>. .hat is dream cartography/
?. To e#perience dream consciousness (hat must be done (hile
falling asleep/
@. ,ould a tape measure become an anchor used to achie&e
dream consciousness/
1A. .hat e#periences in dreams often spontaneously gi&e rise to a
state of conscious a(areness/
11. .hat must immediately be done after becoming conscious
(hile dreaming/
#asks
1. E&ery day immediately before going to sleep culti&ate a
strong desire to become conscious in future dreams.
+. .hen you (ake up recall or (rite do(n the episodes and
plots of your dreams e&ery day.
8. Try to achie&e at least one instance of dream consciousness.
Chapter * ! +on-autono(ous ,ethods
#7E ESSE+CE O2 +O+-A4#O+O,O4S ,E#7O&S
2O9 E+#E9I+G #7E P7ASE
/on-autono$ous $ethods of entering the phase are various types
of e#ternal influences that are a"le to help put a practitioner into the
phase state( ,omputer programs de&ices &arious physical actions
the aid of a helper or e&en chemical substances are e#amples of non"
autonomous methods. )n certain cases these methods actually help
(hile some hinder the possibility of a genuine phase e#perience.
'e&er count on a magical substance or machine to automatically
eliminate the difficulties associated (ith phase entrance. )f such a
substance e#isted the (hole topic of phase e#perimentation (ould
e#ist at an ad&anced le&el of de&elopment and pre&alence in society.
)n actuality there are no de&ices or methods able to consistently
pro&ide access to the phase state. 1t best these e#ist in a largely
supplementary capacity and the more a practitioner is able to do on
his or her o(n the more helpful and effecti&e these supplements are.
)f phase entry has not been mastered autonomously then results
through the use of supplements (ill be totally accidental.
The reason behind the (eak effecti&eness of non"autonomous
methods of phase entrance rests in the fact that the physiological
process responsible for the phase e#perience cannot be e#actly
defined. Only generalities are kno(n nothing else. )n order to gain a
clear understanding of the state the processes that gi&e rise to it must
be discerned and analy=ed. 1ll e#isting technologies ha&e either
blundered do(n a clearly mistaken path Fsynchroni=ing the
hemispheres of the brainG or tra&elled to(ard the detection and use
of indirect indicators Fcueing technologiesG.
C4EI+G #EC7+O;OGIES
Of all non"autonomous assistance methods cueing technologies
yield the best results. The operating principle behind cueing
technologies is 2uite simple- a de&ice detects rapid eye mo&ement
FREMG and sends signals to a sleeping practitioner prompting dream
consciousness or an a(akening that may be follo(ed by indirect
techni2ues. ,ueing programs or de&ices may also send indicators
o&er specific inter&als of timeJ these are recei&ed during REM sleep
and are meant to cause a sleeping practitioner to a(aken and attempt
indirect techni2ues.
More sophisticated REM"detecting technologies may be
purchased at speciali=ed stores or through online merchandisers.
REM"detecting technologies (ork by &irtue of special night mask
e2uipped (ith a motion sensor that detects the fre2uency of specific
eye mo&ements that occur during REM sleep. .hen the eye
mo&ements reach REM 2uality the de&ice sends discreet signals to
the practitioner through light sound &ibrations or a combination of
these. )n turn the practitioner must discern the signal and react to it
(hile sleeping (ith the goal of phase entry through dream
consciousness.
The effecti&eness of REM"detecting de&ices is more plausible in
theory than in practice. The mind 2uickly de&elops a tolerance for
these types of e#ternal stimuli and stops reacting and as a result
such technologies are hardly used more than one or t(o nights per
(eek. 4econdly a practitioner (ill detect only a small portion of the
signals and conscious reaction occurs in e&en smaller instances.
,ueing technologies are best used to send signals that allo( a
practitioner to a(aken (ithout mo&ing during REM sleep (hich
facilitates a high probability of phase entrance through indirect
techni2ues.
Pricing of these !mind"machines$ Fthe common moniker of any
de&ice that purports to produce altered consciousnessG (idely &aries
and is determined by 2uality of REM detection and signaling.
1&ailable models include- 7ream4talker 7reamMaker
F'o&a7reamerG REM"7reamer 1stral ,atapult among many
others. 4ince the use of these de&ices does not guarantee increased
success in practice in&esting money in the technology is not
recommended. )f a practitioner is curious about cueing technologies
similar de&ices may be constructed at home using a special computer
program and a run"of"the"mill optical mouse. 7esigns for a
homegro(n setup are easily located on the )nternet.
1nother do"it"yourself (ay of e#perimenting (ith cueing is
through the use of a computer a music player or e&en the alarm
clock function on a mobile phone. The practitioner sa&es short
sounds or phrases played as an alarm e&ery 1; to 8A minutes (hile
sleeping. These sounds (ill signal the practitioner to (ake up and
attempt indirect techni2ues.
)f the practitioner decides to use cueing technology se&eral
fundamental principles should be considered as results (ill be less
likely if they are ignored. First mind"machines should be used no
more than t(ice a (eek. Other(ise too high a tolerance (ill be built
up rendering the machines ineffecti&e. 4econd use cueing
technology in combination (ith the deferred method (hich (as
co&ered in the section on indirect techni2ues. )t is better to sleep for
si# hours (ithout distraction and then after sleep has been
interrupted put on a sleep"mask or earpiece and continue sleeping.
4leep (ill be light for the remaining t(o to four hours as there (ill
be more REM sleep making it easier for the mind to detect cueing
signals. Finally master indirect techni2ues before making use of
cueing technologies to attain dream consciousness and subse2uent
phase entrance.
)O9=I+G I+ PAI9S

.orking in pairs is considered the second most effecti&e non"
autonomous methods of entering the phase. One practitioner is to be
the acti&e one and the other fills the role of helper. The acti&e one
practitioner attempts to enter the phase (hile the helper pro&ides
&arious types of support to this end.
For e#ample the acti&e practitioner lies do(n in bed (hile the
helper stays nearby (aiting for the acti&e one to fall asleep. .hen
sleep occurs the helper obser&es the eyes of the acti&e (atching for
the signs of REM sleep (hich is mainly characteri=ed by 2uick eye
mo&ements. .hen REM is apparent the helper (hispers to the
sleeper communicating that e&erything the practitioner is
e#periencing is a dream. The helper may &ary the &olume of the
(hisper use touch to strengthen the signal or shine a flashlight on
the sleeperDs eyelids I (hich is &ery effecti&e.
The acti&e practitioner should detect the signals (ithout (aking
and indicate a state of conscious a(areness by performing 2uick
cyclical eye mo&ements. )f no such indication is gi&en the helper
continues to rouse the acti&e practitioner (ho may finally (ake.
)f the acti&e practitioner is unable to stay in the dream indirect
techni2ues should be performed. The acti&e practitioner should under
no circumstances mo&e upon a(akening or (aste &aluable seconds
before transitioning to indirect attempts. )f phase entrance does not
occur after e#ercising the techni2ues the practitioner should again
fall asleep (ith the intention of making another attempt.
3enerally se&eral such attempts are enough to glean results.
.orking in pairs is best performed %ust prior to a daytime nap or
(ith the same deferred method used for indirect techni2ues " an
early"morning interruption of a practitionerDs nighttime sleep.
#EC7+O;OGIES 2O9 I+&4CI+G #7E P7ASE
The ambition to create a de&ice facilitates 2uick and easy phase
entrance has led to the appearance of assorted technologies that claim
to fulfill such a role. 1s already stated none of these de&ices has
been pro&en effecti&e.
The most famous of these is the 6emi"4ync system (hich
purports to synchroni=e the t(o hemispheres of the brain. 6emi"4ync
(as de&eloped by Robert Monroe an 1merican esotericism e#pert
researcher. The idea behind 6emi"4ync is that out"of"body sensations
may be induced by achie&ing synchroni=ation of the brainDs t(o
hemispheres. 6o(e&er this type of approach yields a parado# for the
lack of scientific For pseudo"scientificG e&idence that hemispheric
synchroni=ation influences sensory perception. 1ctually it is the
cerebral corte# and constituents that are primarily responsible for
sensory perception. 1t the beginning of the +A
th
century it became
clear that the key roles in sensory processes are played by &arying
le&els of inhibition and acti&ity in the cerebral corte# and almost not
else(here.
The key to sol&ing the problem of technologically induced phase
entrance rests in the inhibition processes of the cerebral corte#.
4ynchroni=ation de&ices ha&e no effect on the operation of the
cerebral corte#. The idea of using sounds of &arious fre2uencies to
induce a specific le&el of electrical acti&ity in the brain is so far
considered impossible. Thus the sounds and noises used to assist
separation from the body cannot directly affect the process but
merely ser&e as cueing signals. 4uch a system (orks only after
ha&ing been used for a long time if it (orks at all. Moreo&er it
might only (ork once or t(ice. 'e&ertheless synchroni=ation
systems are able to help practitioners reach a free floating state of
consciousness since the systems pre&ent sleep or induce (akefulness
pro&iding fertile ground for direct phase entry. 6o(e&er the systems
ha&e nothing at all to do (ith synchroni=ing the t(o hemispheres of
the brain.
The idea of inducing &arious phase states through sound has
gained (ide attention. Many other programs and technologies ha&e
appeared as a result including for e#ample the 5rain .a&e
3enerator F5.3G (hich allo(s the practitioner to independently
e#periment (ith a (ide array of sounds and fre2uencies and &arious
methods of transmission. The effect is the same- cueing during sleep
or the maintenance of a transitional state. Thus there is no noticeable
difference bet(een using machines and listening to similar sounds or
musical compositions.
)nasmuch as the de&ices described abo&e ha&e not deli&ered
notable result the search for ne( technologies continues unhindered.
The number of ideas to e#ert nonin&asi&e influence o&er the brain
and its constituent parts is increasing. For e#ample there is a theory
that phase e#periences may be induced by electromagnetically
stimulating the left angular gyrus. 6o(e&er this like all other non"
autonomous methods is strictly based on theory. 1t present
consistent focused unassisted practice is the simplest and only
guaranteed means to achie&ing phase entrance.
78P+OSIS A+& S4GGES#IO+
6ypnosis is a little"studied method of entering the phase. The idea
is that a hypnotist is able to cause a person to enter the phase through
suggestion or affirmation. There is no doubt that hypnosis is an
interesting concept especially for persons (ho easily yield to po(er
of suggestion but such indi&iduals account for only 1K of the
population.
7ue to specific characteristics of human perception the chances
are nil that hypnosis is a likely conduit to phase entrance. 4o it seems
unlikely that hypnotic techni2ues (ill become (ell"kno(n or that a
top"notch hypnotist (ould through suggestion easily be able to lead
a sub%ect directly into the phase.
6o(e&er it is completely feasible that hypnotic suggestion may
promote higher fre2uency in dream consciousness or a(akening
(ithout mo&ing Fand remembering to do indirect techni2uesG. 6ere
again this method is only a facilitator (hile actual phase entrance
depends on the efforts of the practitioner.
P78SIO;OGICA; SIG+A;S
The simplest (ay to supplement the practice is establishing a
reminder that prompts conscious a(akening and subse2uent indirect
techni2ues. This may be accomplished by blindfolding the eyes or
tying a cord taut around an arm or leg. The idea is that the reminder
is immediately felt (hen the practitioner (akes prompting the
attempt of indirect techni2ues. )n actuality mind"machines (ork
using the same principle since these are most effecti&e as cues that
arouse an intention to perform a specific action.
1 more sophisticated e#ample of a reminder is (hen a
practitioner do=es off in a position meant to cause numbness to a
certain body part. .hile a(akening the practitioner (ill take the
physical numbness a cue to practice indirect techni2ues. 1 secondary
benefit to this method of physiological signaling is that the numb
body part may easily be used to perform phantom (iggling. Falling
asleep (hile lying on the back (ith an arm behind the head or by
lying directly on an arm are effecti&e e#amples. These and other
postures (ill impede circulation cause numbness and promote
a(akening. 'aturally the numbness should not be e#cessi&e.
7i&erse e#periments that e#ploit physiological needs are
especially popular for inducing conscious a(akening or becoming
conscious (hile dreaming. For e#ample a practitioner may forgo
(ater o&er the course of the day before attempting to enter the phase.
The effect is an acute thirst (hile dreaming (hich may be used to
communicate that the dream state has taken o&er. Or thirst causes
repeated a(akenings during (hich the practice of indirect techni2ues
may commence. 1n alternati&e to depri&ing the body of (ater is
including more salt in foods consumed before going to sleep.
1nother method is to drink a lot of (ater before sleep causing the
practitioner to a(aken naturally producing an opportunity to perform
indirect techni2ues. Using this has been kno(n to result in dream
consciousness.
1nother popular method helps (ith direct techni2ues. )t (orks by
falling asleep (hile keeping the forearm propped up at the elbo(.
.hen the practitioner falls asleep the forearm falls to the bed as the
body shuts do(n. Feeling the arm fall signals a lapse of
consciousness after (hich direct techni2ues may be attempted. )f this
method fails to produce results on the first try it may be repeated by
raising the forearm before falling asleep. This method helps some
but rarely on the first try. )t should not be counted as panacea.
0ike all other non"autonomous methods practicing phase entrance
using physiological signals should not be done on a regular basis.
There are more pleasant autonomous techni2ues that only re2uire a
natural (illpo(er and healthy desire.

C7E,ICA; S4BS#A+CES
4ince the beginning the history of ad&ances in phase entrance
methodologies has included a direct link to the use of consumable
supplements starting (ith plants and mushrooms in ancient times.
The use of speciali=ed herbs mushrooms and cacti is still practiced
in isolated culturesJ 4iberian shamans and 'orth 1merican )ndians
for e#ample. 1mid the hunger for altered states of a(areness these
chemical supplements ha&e reached e&ery corner of the de&eloped
(orld. 6o(e&er the proliferation of these substances has caused a
marked degradation in the progress of modern phase practice.
The names and descriptions of these &arious chemical
concoctions herbs and plants included are not (orthy of inclusion in
this te#t. They are officially considered illegal in some countries
(hile still a&ailable in the pharmacies of othersJ ne&ertheless they
are all dangerous.
There are t(o primary problems (ith using such supplements.
First practicing the phase through the consumption of chemical
substances and &arious herbal supplements is not a path to
de&elopment but to ruin. 7rug abuse and personal de&elopment are
polar opposites in no (ay compatible. ,heap thrills are consistently
follo(ed by chemical dependencies and health problems.
4econd although a user may e#perience phase sensations under
the influence of such substances the 2uality of e#perience is
completely different. )t is not only the stability or depth of phase that
are affected by these supplements but a userDs consciousness and
a(areness. The use of substances and the resultant alteration of
mental processes negati&ely impact self"a(areness. The phase must
be accompanied by t(o things- phase sensations and a complete
conscious a(areness. )f one of these is missing then the state
e#perienced by definition is not the phase. .hen descriptions of
these chemically !enhanced$ e#periences are studied the hallmark of
e&ery one is a complete lack of control.
Using any type of chemical or herbal substance to reach the phase
must be ruled out. 4ummarily these make it impossible to e#perience
the phase and ultimately destroy physical and mental health.
#7E 24#49E O2 +O+-A4#O+O,O4S ,E#7O&S
2O9 E+#E9I+G #7E P7ASE
E&en though no beneficial non"autonomous technologies
currently e#ist the future is (ide open before them.
.ith the de&elopment of effecti&e technologies the phase (ill
cease as the e#clusi&e domain of the initiated and become a
(idespread practice. Only then (ill the Fsometimes %ustifiedG
stereotypes and pre%udices connected to the mystical nature of the
phenomenon be dispelled and only then (ill the phase gain the
necessary attention from researchers needed to ably de&elop the
science of phase practice.
.hen e#ternally applied methods that cause phase entrance are
disco&ered the human e#perience (ill drastically change. These
technologies for inducing and monitoring phase e#periences (ill
open up incredible possibilities. For e#ample it (ill be possible to
participate in a mo&ie instead of %ust (atchingJ people (ill be able to
try and e&aluate products (ithout lea&ing homeJ tra&el throughout
designed (orlds (ill take placeJ computer games (ill be substituted
(ith analogous e#periences including real physical sensations.
The ultimate step (ould be the unification of phase e#periences
into a collecti&e parallel (orld integrated to e#istent digital
net(orks- the Matri# Fthe MindnetG. Using this Matri# it (ill be
possible to communicate (ith someone on the other side of the planet
" not %ust through a broadband &ideo link but literally tCte D tCte.
This &ision of the future is a drop in the ocean of possibilities that
(ill open (ith phase entrance technologies. The first step to(ard the
future is a thorough pragmatic and correct application of the
techni2ues no( a&ailable.
#8PICA; ,IS#A=ES
)I#7 +O+-A4#O+O,O4S #EC7+I<4ES
The belief that de&ices are able to phase entrance if autonomous
techni2ues fail e&en though it is much easier to enter the phase
through strictly indi&idual efforts.
.asting a large amount of time and effort on &arious
technologies to create a phase state. 'o such technology e#ists.
Using cueing technologies on a daily basis e&en though they
arenDt supposed to be used more than t(ice a (eek.
Using cueing technologies all night long (hen it is much better
to use these in con%unction (ith the deferred method.
Using cueing technologies (ithout affirming a personal intention
of appropriate reaction to the signals- this is crucial to cue
effecti&eness.
.orking in pairs during the first hours of nighttime sleep e&en
though REM sleep occurs infre2uently and then for only short
periods of time.
.hile (orking in pairs the helper gi&ing an acti&e practitioner
too strong a signal. 4ignals should be kept discreet to pre&ent (aking
the sleeper.
Employing an amateur hypnotist to increase the fre2uency of
dream consciousness.
The use of hypnotic suggestion to a practitioner (ho is not
susceptible to hypnosis.
Using physiological signals on a daily basis causing physical
discomfort &ersus getting en%oyment out of the practice.
The belief chemical substances promote dissociati&e e#periences.
1cting on this belief is e2ui&alent to drug abuse.
E-ercises for Chapter *
<uestions
1. 1re techni2ues based on breathing be considered non"
autonomous methods of entering the phase/
+. .hich non"autonomous and non"chemical means allo( phase
entrance after the first attempts/
8. .hy is it still not possible to create a de&ice that causes phase
entry/
:. 1re cueing technologies beneficial to o&ercoming difficulties
(ith conscious a(akening/
;. .hat happens if a practitioner uses cueing technologies for
se&en days in a ro(/
<. ,an cueing technologies make use of light signals/
>. ,an feasting on peanuts before sleep help the process of phase
entry/
?. .ill putting a tight rubber band around an ankle promote
phase entry/
@. .hile (orking in a pair are both practitioners re2uired to
enter the phase/
1A. ,an the helper be compared to a cueing de&ice (hile (orking
in a pair/
11. .hen should the helper gi&e the signal that the acti&e
practitioner is dreaming/
1+. .ould a hypnotist making suggestions about entering the
phase be helpful to e&ery practitioner/
18. .hy do phase"inducing technologies sometimes (ork e&en
though these are based on fla(ed theories/
1:. .hat is absent in a phase induced by chemical substances/
#asks
1. Try using a cueing de&ice se&eral times in con%unction (ith
the deferred method. ,reate a short sound file and set it to a
de&ice that plays the file bet(een 1;"minute inter&als of silence.
+. 5efore going to sleep at night try the raised forearm method
of entering the phase se&eral times. 1ttempt this using the
deferred method.
8. )f you ha&e the opportunity try to achie&e entry into the phase
by (orking in pairs.
Part II
,anaging the Out-of-Body E-perience
Chapter . - &eepening
#7E CO+CEP# O2 &EEPE+I+G
3eepening refers to techni4ues that induce realistic perception
and a&areness in the phase state(
The phase is not an e#act fi#ed state (here a practitioner is
present or not. )t is a realm of states characteri=ed by a transition
from the usual perception of the physical body to a complete
alienation from it (hile maintaining consciousness and reality of
perception albeit in a different frame of space. The transition begins
(ith perception of the natural physical body follo(ed by a moment
of ambiguity (here a clear e#perience of body is intermingled (ith a
sense of the percei&ed body. 1fter(ard the percei&ed body enters the
phase space (hile the physical body becomes a memory. 1t this
point the percei&ed senses may be 2uite dullJ for e#ample &ision
may be blurred or completely absent. 7eepening techni2ues sol&e the
problem of diminished or absent sensory perception in the phase.
4ensory e#periences (ithin a fully reali=ed phase e#perience are
as realistic as those in e&eryday reality. )n almost one"half of all
cases practitioners obser&e that reality"based surroundings pale in
comparison to &ibrant detail and color of the phase space. To this
end after entering the phase a practitioner must perform deepening
techni2ues to enhance and solidify the degree and 2uality of phase
reality.
Full spatial perception in the phase only occurs after deepening
techni2ues ha&e been applied. There (ould be no point to remaining
in the phase (ithout deepening. For e#ample (hat is the point in
finding a person in phase if it is not e&en possible to discern his or
her eyes there/
-n a considera"le nu$"er of cases, deepening is not necessary,
since the phase e#perience is co$pletely realistic, if not hyper-
realistic( -n cases li+e these, deepening $ay "e "ypassed(
7eepening is also related to the length of time a practitioner may
remain in the phase. )f an action is taken (ithout a deep realistic
phase the e#perience (ill al(ays be se&eral times shorter in duration
than a phase (here deepening techni2ues had been applied. The
properties of the phase space &ery much depend on its depth. .hen
surroundings are blurry and unclear the stability of ob%ects is &ery
(eak.
There is a direct correlation bet(een the realism of a phase and a
practitionerDs le&el of a(areness so it is e#tremely important to
ensure a deep phase in order to promote ma#imum a(areness.
Interesting Fact!
The realis$ of a deep phase space is often so great
that it causes uncontrolla"le fear or shoc+(

7eepening should only be performed follo(ing complete
separation from the body. )f initiated before separation the phase
may end prematurely. )f complete separation does not occur primary
deepening should be used. 1s regards the deepening techni2ues
themsel&es there is one main one and there are se&eral subsidiary
ones. The main techni2ue (hich does not present any difficulties is
sufficient for ha&ing a successful practice.
Interesting Fact!
-gnorance of deepening techni4ues has led to a
great nu$"er of "aseless theories and superstitions(
So$e practices treat differing phase depths as
various states and even &orlds( -n reality, there are
si$ple actions that ensure a singular phase
e#perience(
P9I,A98 &EEPE+I+G #EC7+I<4ES
The goal of primary deepening is to achie&e complete separation
from the body allo(ing further actions (ithin the phase. Primary
deepening entails achie&ing t(o principal ob%ecti&es- complete
separation from the physical body and anchoring the percei&ed body
(ithin the phase space.
.hen separation from the body occurs through the use of a
separation techni2ue a posture must be assumed that completely
different from the posture of the real physical body. The greater the
degree of postural similarity bet(een the physical and percei&ed
bodies the more shallo( and brief the phase (ill be. For e#ample in
the case of hori=ontal le&itation a 1?A turn must immediately
performed arms and legs spread adopting a &ertical posture. Under
no circumstances should a practitioner in the phase remain in a
posture identical to that of the physical body.
)f a practitioner is pulled back to(ard the body after separation
anchoring should be initiated that facilitates standing or sitting in the
phase. Resisting the gra&ity of the physical body is paramount to
remaining in the phase. The result of (illful resistance is directly
proportional to the degree of applied effort. )t (ill help to grab hold
of surrounding ob%ects and hold on to themJ any means of anchoring
the percei&ed body (ithin the phase are appropriate. )t is possible to
start rotating around an a#isJ not simply imagining the rotation but
performing it (ith the percei&ed body as (ell.
&EEPE+I+G #79O4G7 SE+SO98 A,P;I2ICA#IO+
The more a phase is e#perienced by the sensory faculties the
deeper and longer the phase (ill be. 4ensory amplification in the
phase is the most effecti&e deepening techni2ue precisely because it
allo(s the acti&ation of primary internal sensations during the
transition from reality to the phase. There are se&eral (ays to
perform sensory amplification.

Ealpation is the first deepening techni2ue that should be recalled
(hen entering the phase.
9ision may be absent at the beginning of a phase e#perience but
the sensation of occupying a defined space is almost al(ays present.
)n the case of a completely absent sense of sight only tactile"
kinesthetic perception is possible. That is mo&ement throughout a
space and the touching ob%ects there is the only option (hen &ision is
absent. The sense of touch plays a key role in the perception of
e&eryday reality. 1ccordingly if the sense of touch is acti&ely used in
the phase space it is only natural that the phase (ill deepen and reach
its ma#imum potential.
Palpation is performed by fleetingly touching anything that may
be found in the immediate surroundings. This should be done by
2uickly but carefully percei&ing the feel of surfaces and shapes.
6ands should not remain on a particular place for more than one
second remaining constantly in motion to locate ne( ob%ects. The
goal of palpation is to touch and also to learn something about
encountered ob%ects or shapes. For e#ample if one feels a mug one
may touch it not only from the outside but also from the inside. Once
a practitioner has rolled out of the body the bed may be touchedJ the
physical body lying in bed may be touched as (ell as the floor the
carpet nearby (alls or a bedside table.
1nother palpation techni2ue is performed by rubbing the palms
against each other as if trying to (arm them on a cold day. 5lo(ing
on the palms also produces sensations that (ill help deepen the
phase. 4ince tactile perception of the (orld is not limited to the
palms the hands should be mo&ed o&er the entire body (hile in the
phase to e#cite and fully acti&ate the sense of touch.
1s soon as palpation begins the feeling that the phase is
deepening and becoming fi#ed soon follo(s. Usually it takes fi&e to
1A seconds of palpation e#ercises to reach the ma#imum le&el of
deepening. 1fter performing this techni2ue the pseudo"physical
sensations (ill be indistinguishable from those of e&eryday reality. )f
&ision is absent on phase entry it 2uickly emerges during palpation.
Eeering is the primary technical &ariation of sensory
amplification. 6o(e&er it is not al(ays initially accessible since it
re2uires &ision (hich may begin as absent in the phase. Once &ision
appears or has been created using special techni2ues Fsee ,hapter ?G
peering may begin. The effecti&eness of this techni2ue originates in
the fact that &ision is the humanDs primary instrument of perception.
Therefore by e#citing &ision to its ma#imum potential (ithin the
phase it is possible to attain a fully immersi&e phase state that is
completely apart from normal reality.
Peering should be done at a distance of four to si# inches from
ob%ects (ithin the phase. 1 practitioner should glance o&er the
minute details of ob%ects and surfaces to bring definition to the phase
space (hile increasing the 2uality of &ision. .hen looking at hands
the lines of the palm or the fingernail and cuticles should be
e#amined. )f obser&ing a (all study the te#ture of its (allpaper.
.hen looking at a mug one should look carefully at its handle the
cur&e of its rim or any inscriptions. 1ttention should not remain on
one area of an ob%ect for more than half a second. 1cti&e obser&ation
should constantly mo&e to ne( ob%ects and their minute details
approaching ob%ects or picking them up to dra( them nearer. )tDs best
(hen ob%ects near one anotherJ other(ise too much time is spent
mo&ing around.
Peering brings 2uick and clear results. Usually if &ision is blurry
and there is a yearning to return into the physical body (ith %ust 8"1A
seconds of peering all of this (ill be gone (ithout a trace. 1fter
peering &ision ad%usts as 2uickly and clearly as if a camera lens (as
correctly installed in front of the eyes capturing the image in the
sharpest of focus.
Si$ultaneous peering and palpation pro&ide the ma#imum
possible deepening effect in the phase. This method of sensory
amplification engages the t(o most important percepti&e thus the
effect is t(ice greater than (hen the t(o actions are separately
performed. )f &ision is present in the phase simultaneous peering and
palpation is an absolute necessity because it facilitates good phase
depth in the 2uickest and simplest manner.
The combination of palpation and peering must not only be
performed simultaneously but also upon the same ob%ects. For
e#ample (hile a practitioner may look at the hands and
simultaneously rub them against each otherJ or (hile looking at a
coffee mug all of its parts may be obser&ed and touched at the same.
)t is necessary to maintain dynamism of action remembering that
feelings should be e#perienced not half"heartedly remembering that
full concentration on sensory amplification is an e#cellent means to a
deep 2uality phase.
SECO+&A98 &EEPE+I+G #EC7+I<4ES
&i>ing 7eadfirst
7i&ing headfirst is used if sensory amplification techni2ues do
not (ork or (hen the practitioner in the phase is located in an
undefined space (here there is nothing to touch or look at. This
techni2ue (orks thanks to the unusual &estibular sensations that it
causes (hich help to enhance perception. This techni2ue is
performed (ith the eyes shut if &ision is a&ailable and the practitioner
literally di&es headfirst into the floor or space at the feet. 1 feeling of
mo&ement a(ay from the physical body (ill immediately arise
during the flight do(n and the di&e itself (ill be e#perienced as if it
is really happening. 4imultaneously the surrounding space may
darken and become colder. 1gitation or fear may also appear. 1fter
fi&e to 1; seconds of flight the practitioner is either arri&es in an
undetermined place in the phase or hits a dead end like a (all. )n the
case of a dead end a translocation techni2ue should be used.
Translocation may also be attempted if deepening does not occur
during the flight if sense perception stops impro&ing or if a good
degree of realism has already been achie&ed. 1n alternati&e to the
translocation techni2ue- hold the hands about four to si# inches in
front of the face and try to obser&e them (ithout opening the eyesJ
this (ill mo&e the practitioner to another random location.
.hen falling headfirst do not think about the floorJ assume that it
(ill be penetrated. This &ery effecti&e if the phase has not reached a
fullness of depth.
1 desire to not simply fall do(n obser&ing oneDs perceptions but
instead race s(iftly do(n(ard (hile trying to mo&e a(ay from the
body is e#tremely important. )n case of failure to do so instead of
deepening such a fall may lead to a return to the state of being
a(ake i.e. to a foul.
?ibration
0ike falling headfirst the &ibration techni2ue should be used if
sensory amplification techni2ues do not (ork or (hen the
practitioner in the phase is located in an undefined space (here there
is nothing to touch or look at.
1fter separating from the body it is normally 2uite easy to create
&ibrations by thinking about them by straining the brain or by
straining the body (ithout using muscles. The occurrence of
&ibrations pro&ides a significant opportunity to deepen the phase. 1n
ad&antage of this techni2ue is that it does not re2uire any preliminary
actions and thus may be practiced at any moment.
The brain is strained to the ma#imum e#tent possible (hich
cause &ibrations that may be intensified and managed through
spasmodic or prolonged straining.
)f this techni2ue does not produce deepening after fi&e to 1A
seconds the techni2ue has to be changed or action should be taken at
the practitionerDs current depth in the phase.
Aggressi>e Action
This techni2ue may be used as an alternati&e to any other
deepening techni2ue since it can be used at any moment. Practicing
this techni2ue only re2uires aggressi&e action of the percei&ed body.
1 practitioner may run roll on the floor perform gymnastics or
mo&e the arms and legs. Ma#imum acti&ity and aggression are
paramount to the successful use of this techni2ue.
)f the practitioner is stuck in a dark space (a&ing the arms and
legs from side to side is appropriate. )f the practitioner is in (ater
s(imming (ith determined po(erful strokes (ould be suitable
recourse. The type of action &ery much depends on the specific
situation along (ith an aggressi&e desire on the part of the
practitioner.
1s a rule the effect of such mo&ements and relocations comes
2uite 2uickly especially if attention is focused on all the
accompanying sensations.
I(agining reality
This interesting techni2ue should be used by e#perienced
practitioners or if all other deepening techni2ues fail.
1 practitioner aggressi&ely imagines being located in the physical
(orld e#periencing its intrinsic reality of perception and not in the
phase. This should be done (hile in a state of separation from the
body (ith a sense of &ision present. )f successful the surrounding
phase space (ill immediately brighten and sensory perception of the
phase (ill e#ceed the normal e#perience of reality.
)f this techni2ue produces no clear results after a fe( seconds
another techni2ue should be used.
GE+E9A; AC#I?I#8
1ll deepening techni2ues should be practiced (ith a high le&el of
aggression (ith no pauses only continuous deliberate action. )f
techni2ues are practiced in a calm rela#ed manner then deepening
attempts (ill most often result in falling asleep or returning to the
body.

#8PICA; ,IS#A=ES &49I+G &EEPE+I+G
Forgetting to perform deepening techni2ues (hen necessary.
,arrying out unnecessary deepening (hile at a sufficient depth.
6alting deepening techni2ues before reaching ma#imum realism
in the phase.
,arrying out main deepening techni2ues prior to ha&ing become
completely separated from the body although at this time only
primary deepening should be used.
,ontinuing deepening techni2ues (hen results ha&e already been
achie&ed.
1lternating too 2uickly bet(een deepening techni2ues instead of
concentrating on each of them for at least fi&e to 1A seconds.
Performing the techni2ues slo(ly and calmly instead of
aggressi&ely.
1pplying techni2ues of sensory amplification (hile stuck in a
shapeless dark space (hen these should only be performed in a &i&id
and realistic place.
Obser&ing ob%ects located too far from the eyes during &isual
sensori=ation instead of the re2uired four to fi&e inches.
.hen peering scrutini=ing a single detail of an ob%ect for too
long (hen it is necessary to 2uickly s(itch from one detail to
another.
Taking in a (hole ob%ect (hen peering (hile only parts of it
should be obser&ed.
,oncentrating too long on the details of a single ob%ect instead of
focusing on different ob%ects in 2uick succession.
0ong palpation of a single ob%ect during sensory amplification
instead of rapidly s(itching from one ob%ect to another.
7eepening (hile standing in place (hen it is important to
maintain constant motion.
Falling headfirst (ith the eyes open although the eyes must be
shut to a&oid crashing into the floor.
Falling headfirst (ithout the desire or intention of falling far and
2uickly.
Forgetting to use translocation techni2ues after hitting a dead end.
Forgetting to alternate deepening techni2ues if some of them are
not (orking.
Fear of the hyperrealism of the e#perience and halting deepening
instead of calmly continuing (ith the techni2ue.
E-ercises for Chapter .
<uestions
1. 1fter (hich phase entrance techni2ues is deepening
necessary/
+. .hy is phase deepening necessary/
8. 1re there cases (here phase deepening is unnecessary/
:. .hat le&el of reality should be achie&ed by deepening/
;. .hen should deepening begin after entering the phase/
<. 7oes deepening influence the length of a phase e#perience/
>. .hy is primary deepening necessary/
?. May one touch oneDs head (hen the performing sensori=ation
of feelings/
@. 4hould a practitioner look at curtains (hile peering/
1A. )s it effecti&e to apply peering at phase ob%ects from a distance
of 1 to 1.; yards/
11. ,an peering be used during palpation/
1+. .hen should the eyes be closed (hile falling headfirst/
18. .ould thro(ing punches like a bo#er help a practitioner to
deepen/
1:. 6o( calmly should the deepening techni2ues be performed/
#asks
1. 7e&ote the ne#t three successful phases to perfecting
deepening techni2ues using all of the methods described in this
chapter.
+. Using personal e#perience try %udging (hich techni2ue suits
you best from personal e#perience.
Chapter / - ,aintaining
#7E GE+E9A; CO+CEP# O2 ,AI+#AI+I+G
Ehase $aintenance or >$aintaining? refers to techni4ues that
allo& a practitioner to re$ain in the phase for the $a#i$u$ a$ount
of ti$e possi"le( .ithout kno(ledge of !maintaining$ techni2ues the
duration of the phase (ill be se&eral times shorter than it could
other(ise be. The shortest phases last %ust a fe( seconds. 5eginning
practitioners usually fear not being able to e#it a phaseJ this shouldnDt
e&er be a concern because the real challenge is being able to maintain
the phase state (hich is easily lost unless phase maintenance
techni2ues are used.

Phase maintenance consists of three primary principles- resisting a
return to the (akeful state Fkno(n as a foulG resisting falling asleep
and resisting a false e#it from the phase. 1s a rule the first t(o
problems Freturn to a (akeful state or falling asleepG are often
encountered by beginners but the third difficulty Ffalse e#itG
manifests at later stages of practice.
Resistance to returning to the body is self"e#planatory (hereas
resistance to falling asleep is unclear to many. 'ot e&eryone kno(s
that almost half of phase e#periences usually end in a 2uite tri&ial
(ay " falling asleep. 1 person usually looses attenti&eness his or her
a(areness dissipates and e&erything around gradually looses clarity
and turns into (hat is for all intents and purposes a usual dream.
Resisting a false e#it from the phase is a lot more surprising and
dramatic. 4ometimes a practitioner detects an impending e#it from
the phase subse2uent deepening techni2ues fail to (ork resulting in
(hat seems to be a return to the body and physical reality. 4ure that
the phase has ended a practitioner may stand up and the fall asleep
after percei&ing a fe( steps. )n such cases falling asleep most often
happens (ithout any mo&ement but (hile still lying in bed. The
problem is that the difference bet(een the phase and reality can be so
subtle that in terms of internal or e#ternal indicators the phase
practically canDt be distinguished from reality. Therefore one must
kno( the necessary actions to take in the e&ent that the phase ceases
since the end of a phase could actually be a trick and purely
imagined.
There are specific solutions for the three problems described in
addition to general rules that apply to any phase e#perience. 4tudying
these rules should be gi&en %ust as high a priority as studying the
specific solutions since only some of them (hen applied separately
may help one to remain in the phase se&eral times longer than usual.
)n some cases techni2ues for maintaining are not applicable.
6o(e&er kno(ledge of ho( to maintain is useful for the ma%ority of
e#periences. 1lso there might be situations (hen someone need only
resist a foul (hile someone else may need to resist falling asleep. 1ll
of this is &ery specific to each case and can be determined only in
practice.
.ith perfect kno(ledge of all the techni2ues for maintaining a
phase may last t(o to four minutes (hich doesnDt sound like an
e#tended duration but really is. 1 particularity of the phase space is
that achie&ing something and mo&ing around in it takes a minimum
amount of time mere seconds. Thus so much can be done during 8
minutes in the phase that one literally needs a list so as not to (aste
any time.
There are theories that ha&e neither been pro&en nor dispro&en
claiming that time in the phase contracts and e#pands relati&e to real
time. Thus one minute of real time (hile in the phase may feel much
longer in terms of phase time.
Perception of time &aries from practitioner to practitioner. 'o&ices
especially percei&e a real minute as more like fi&e to 1A minutes in
the phase. This is determined by the particularities of indi&idual
psychology state of mind and the type of e&ents that occur in the
phase.
)n order to understand ho( long a phase really lasted one does not
need to try using a stop(atch in the real (orld. )t is better to count
ho( many actions took place in it and ho( much time each of them
could ha&e taken. The result (ill differ from oneDs first rough
estimate se&eral times o&er.
The ma#imum duration the phase &aries depends hea&ily on the
ability to apply phase maintenance techni2ues. 4ome practitioners
ha&e difficulty breaking the t(o"minute barrier (hile some find it
easy to remain in the phase for 1A minutes or longer. )t is physically
impossible to remain in the phase fore&er because e&en a +A"minute
phase is unheard of.

#EC7+I<4ES A+& 94;ES AGAI+S#
9E#49+I+G #O #7E BO&8
Of the follo(ing techni2ues constant sensory amplification and
as"needed sensory amplification are applied the most often (hile
performing phase maintenance. 6o(e&er as opposed to other
technical elements of phase e#ploration other secondary techni2ues
of maintaining often become mainstream and the most appropriate
for certain indi&iduals. Thus all the techni2ues should be studied but
the first t(o should be considered &ery carefully.
Constant Sensory A(plification
The same sensory amplification described in the chapter on
deepening F,hapter <G also applies to !maintaining$. )n essence
ha&ing achie&ed the necessary depth of phase one should not stop to
acti&ely agitate his or her perception but should keep on doing this all
the (hile albeit not as acti&ely as during deepening.
The idea is that during the entire duration of the phase all action
should be focused on e#periencing the ma#imum possible amount of
tactile"kinesthetic and &isual perceptions. This entails constantly
touching and e#amining e&erything in minute detail. For e#ample if
passing by a bookcase touch and e#amine some of the books in it
including their pages and corners. Tactile obser&ation should be
performed on e&ery encountered ob%ect.
Palpation may be applied separately as a background sensation.
This is done in order not to o&erload the sense of sight. The hands
should be touching something all the time or better still rubbing
each other.
As-+eeded Sensory A(plification
1pplying the as"needed sensory amplification techni2ue is no
different than constant sensory amplification. )t is used only (hen a
foul Fa return to a (akeful stateG is imminent or (hen phase &ision
starts to blur and fade. For e#ample (hile tra&eling in the phase
e&erything may start to blur signaling a (eakening of the phase. 1t
this moment the practitioner should touch e&ery a&ailable ob%ectJ
obser&e e&erything in fine detail. 1s soon as returns to a clear and
realistic state actions may be continued (ithout needing to perform
amplification.
Constant ?ibration
This techni2ue is used to maintain constant strong &ibrations in
the phase. 1s pre&iously noted &ibrations are generated by straining
the brain or tensing the body (ithout using muscles. Maintaining
strong &ibrations (ill ha&e a positi&e effect on the length of the
phase.
Strengthening ?ibrations as +eeded
)n this case &ibrations are created and strengthened only if signs
of a foul become apparent. E#amples of foul indicators include
duality of perception or blurred &ision. 4trengthening &ibrations (ill
help to deepen the phase allo(ing a practitioner to stay and continue
(ithin the phase.
&i>ing 7eadfirst
This techni2ue is the same as the deepening techni2ue of the same
name. )f a phase is about to dissol&e di&ing headfirst (ith the eyes
shut and a desire to di&e as 2uickly and deeply as possible. 1s soon
as phase depth returns translocation techni2ues may be used to keep
from arri&ing at a dead end.
2orced 2alling Asleep
1s soon as indicators of a foul appear immediately lie do(n on
the floor and attempt forced falling asleepJ the same as the phase
entry techni2ue. 1fter successfully performing the techni2ue F8"
1Asec.G a practitioner may get up and continue to tra&el through the
phase since the perception of reality and its depth (ill most likely be
restored. Resist actually fall asleep.
9otation
)f indicators of a foul appear the practitioner should start rotating
around the head"to"feet a#is. Unlike the phase entry techni2ue of the
same name the mo&ement does not ha&e to be imagined. This is an
absolutely real rotation in the phase. 1fter se&eral re&olutions depth
(ill be restored and actions may be continued. )f indicators of a foul
persist rotation should continue until proper depth is achie&ed.
Counting
7uring the entire phase count to as large a number possible " not
%ust for the sake of counting but (ith a strong desire to reach the
highest number possible. ,ounting may be performed silently or out
loud.
This techni2ue (orks by creating a strong determination to
remain in the phase by pro&iding a goal that re2uires action in the
phase.
;istening in
)f there are any background sounds similar to those heard (hile
entering the phase " rumbling (histling ringing bu==ing or si==ling
I these sounds may be used to prolong duration of the phase by
aggressi&e attempts at listening in hearing the entire range of internal
sounds. The forced listening in techni2ue may also be used for phase
maintenance.
7ooking onto the phase
1nother interesting method of !maintaining$ is hooking onto the
phase. )n the e&ent of an impending foul grab onto an ob%ect in the
phase acti&ely palpate or s2uee=e it. E&en if a return to the body
occurs during this techni2ue the hands (ill continue to hold the
phase ob%ect and the physical hands (ill not be percei&ed. 5eginning
(ith these phantom feelings in the hands separation from the body is
possible. 1ny nearby ob%ect may be hooked- the leg of a chair a
drinking glass a doorknob a stone or a stick. )f there is nothing to
grab hold of clasp the hands together or bite do(n on a lip or the
tongue.

T(o rules apply to using the techni2ues that help to resist a phase
e#it. First of all ne&er think that the phase might end and result in a
return to the bodyJ thoughts like this are like programming that
immediately send the practitioner to a (akened physical state.
4econdly do not think about the physical body. 7oing (ill also
instantly return the practitioner to the body e&ery time.
#EC7+I<4ES A+& 94;ES
2O9 9ESIS#I+G 2A;;I+G AS;EEP
Constant 4nderstanding of the Possibility of 2alling Asleep
Most of the time falling asleep (hile in the phase can be
o&ercome by a constant a(areness that sleep is possible and
detrimental to a continued phase. 1 practitioner must al(ays consider
the probability of falling asleep and actions must be carefully
analy=ed to ensure that they are based on real desires and not on
parado#ical notions (hich are common to dreams.
Periodic Analysis of A6areness
Periodically asking the 2uestion !1m ) dreaming/$ (hile in the
phase helps appraise situations and the 2uality of the actions being
performed at any moment. )f e&erything meets the standards of full
phase a(areness actions may be continued. 1sked on a regular basis
this 2uestion becomes habit automatically used (hile transitioning to
the phase state. )f you keep asking this 2uestion regularly sooner or
later it (ill arise automatically at the moment (hen you are actually
transitioning into a dream. This (ill then help one to (ake up after
(hich it is possible to continue to remain in a full"fledged phase..
The fre2uency of the 2uestion should be based on a practitionerDs
ability to consistently remain in the phase. )f a phase usually lasts
fi&e to 1A minutes or more it is not necessary to ask the 2uestion
more than once e&ery + minutesJ other(ise this 2uestion has to be
asked fre2uently literally once a minute or %ust a little less often.
There is another important rule related to resisting falling asleep-
no practitioner should engage or participate in spontaneous e&ents
occurring in the phase. E&ents that are not planned or deliberate lead
to a high probability of being immersed in the side action (hich
results in a loss of concentrated a(areness.
#EC7+I<4ES AGAI+S#
A+ 4+9ECOG+IBE& P7ASE
4ince the techni2ues of testing the realness of the end of the phase
are a little absurd and demand additional attention to actions they
should only be used in those cases (hen they are indeed re2uired.
Until then one should simply bear them in mind and use them only
in moments of doubt. The same methods may be used to safely
determine (hether or not the practitioner is in the phase (hen using
techni2ues for entering it.
7yper-concentration
4ince the cessation of the phase e#perience may be simulated and
no different in terms of perception from a real e#it differences
bet(een the physical (orld and the phase (orld must be acti&ely
discerned. )n other (ords a practitioner must kno( ho( to determine
(hether a genuine phase e#it has occurred.
1t present only one e#periment is kno(n to guarantee an
accurate result. The phase space cannot (ithstand prolonged close
&isual attention to the minute details of ob%ects. .ithin se&eral
seconds of acute e#amination shapes begin to distort ob%ects change
color produce smoke melt or morph in other (ays.
1fter e#iting the phase look at a small ob%ect from a distance of
four to si# inches and remain focused on it for 1A seconds. )f the
ob%ect does not change a practitioner can be assured that the
surroundings are reality. )f an ob%ect is someho( distorted or aske(
a practitioner kno(s that the phase is intact. The simplest option is to
look at the tip of the finger since it is al(ays close at hand. )t is also
possible to take a book and e#amine its te#t. Te#t in the phase (ill
either blur or appear as alphabetical gibberish or full of
incomprehensible symbols.
Au-iliary techni$ues
There are a &ariety of other procedures to test the occurrence of a
foul. 6o(e&er since any situation any property or any function can
be simulated in the phase these procedures are not al(ays applicable.
For e#ample some suggest that it is sufficient to attempt doing
something that is realistically impossible and if a practitioner is in
the phase the impossible action (ill be possible. The problem (ith
this suggestion is that the la(s of the physical (orld may be
simulated in the phase so flying passing through (alls or telekinesis
may not be possible e&en in the deepest phase. )t has also been
suggested that looking at a clock t(ice in a ro( may help a
practitioner determine (hether or not the phase is intactJ allegedly
the clock (ill display a different time each time it is obser&ed. 6ere
again the clockDs display may not change in the phase.
Of all the au#iliary procedures one deser&es mention and (orks
in the ma%ority of cases- searching for differences from reality in the
surroundings. 1lthough the usual surroundings of a practitioner may
be 1AAK accurately simulated in the phase it is &ery rare. Therefore
it is possible to figure out (hether a phase is intact by carefully
e#amining the room (here e&erything is taking place. )n the phase
there (ill be something e#tra or something (ill be missingJ the time
of day or e&en the season (ill be different from reality and so on.
For e#ample (hen &erifying (hether a foul occurred a room may be
missing the table supporting a tele&ision set or the table may be
there but be a different color.
GE+E9A; 94;ES 2O9 ,AI+#AI+I+G
The rules for maintaining the phase deal (ith resisting all or most
of the problems (hich cause a phase to end. 4ome of these rules are
capable of increasing the length of stay in the phase by many times
and must be follo(ed.
The practitioner should not loo+ into the distance( )f fara(ay
ob%ects are obser&ed for a long period of time a foul may occur or
one may be translocated to(ards these ob%ects. )n order to look at
distant ob%ects (ithout problems a practitioner has to employ
techni2ues for maintaining. For e#ample from time to time the
practitioner should look at his hands rub them against each other or
maintain strong &ibrations.
:onstant activity( Under no circumstances should a practitioner
remain passi&e and calm in the phase. The more actions performed
the longer the phase is. The fe(er actions I the shorter the phase. )t is
enough to pause for thought and e&erything stops.
Elan of action( There should be a clear plan of action consisting
of at least ; tasks to be carried out in the phase at the earliest
opportunity. This is necessary for se&eral important reasons. First the
practitioner must not pause in the phase to think about !(hat to do
ne#t$ (hich fre2uently results in a foul. 4econd ha&ing a plan the
practitioner (ill subconsciously perform all of the actions necessary
for staying in and maintaining the phase to carry out all the tasks that
ha&e been planned. Third intelligent and pre"planned actions permit
focused ad&ancement of purposeful actions &ersus (asting phase
e#periences on (hate&er comes to mind at a gi&en moment. Fourth a
plan of action creates necessary moti&ation and conse2uently
pronounced intent to perform the techni2ues to enter the phase.
Stopping the -3( The less )nternal 7ialogue F)7G and reflection
that occurs in the phase the longer it lasts. 1ll thinking must be
concentrated on (hat is being achie&ed and percei&ed. Talking to
oneself is completely prohibited. The reason for this is that many
thoughts may act as programming in the phase and e&en announcing
them internally may introduce alterations including negati&e ones.
For e#ample thinking about the body cause a return to it. The
practitioner may also get lost in thought (hich (ill lead to a foul.
1lso sporadic thoughts usually and 2uite easily cause the practitioner
to simply fall asleep.
% practitioner $ust try to re-enter the phase after e#periencing a
foul( 1l(ays remember that a typical phase e#perience consists of
se&eral repeated entries and e#its. Essentially in most cases it is
possible to re"enter the phase through the use of separation or phase
state creation techni2ues immediately after returning to the body. )f
the practitioner has %ust left the phase the brain is still close to it and
appropriate techni2ues may be applied in order to continue the
%ourney.
#8PICA; ,IS#A=ES )I#7 ,AI+#AI+I+G
Forgetting to try to re"enter the phase after it is o&er although
doing so greatly helps to increase number of e#periences had.
4taying focused on techni2ues for !maintaining$ instead of
performing them as background tasks.
3etting distracted by e&ents and dropping phase maintenance
techni2ues instead of continually performing (hatDs needed to
maintain the phase.
4uccumbing to the idea that maintaining is not necessary (hen
the phase appears &ery deep and stable e&en though these could be
false sensations.
Using the necessary techni2ues too late.
4topping due to uncertainty about further actions (hile there
must al(ays be a plan.
Forgetting that it is possible to fall asleep in the phase (ithout
reali=ing it. Recogni=ing the risk of falling asleep must be a primary
focus.
3etting pulled into e&ents occurring in the phase instead of
obser&ing and controlling them from the outside.
Forgetting that techni2ues for !maintaining$ must al(ays be used
to remain in as deep a phase as possible and not %ust for maintaining
any odd state.
4topping the use of techni2ues for !maintaining$ during contact
(ith li&ing ob%ects (hen the techni2ues must be used constantly.
,ounting (ithout the desire to count as high as possible.
Performing imagined rotation instead of real rotation.
Passi&eness and calmness instead of constant acti&ity.
E#cessi&e thinking and internal dialogue (hen these should be
kept to an absolute minimum.
E-ercises for Chapter /
<uestions
1. .hat is a foul/
+. .hat is the minimum duration of the phase/
8. .hat do phase maintenance F!maintaining$G techni2ues
counteract besides fouls and falling asleep/
:. .hy might a practitioner think that the phase has ended (hen it
actually is still in progress/
;. 4hould !maintaining$ techni2ues al(ays be used/
<. .hat primary techni2ues (ork against the occurrence of fouls/
>. 6o( can a practitioner hook onto the phase/
?. .hile in the phase (hat do thoughts about the body lead to/
@. .hat 2uestion should be asked in the phase in order to reduce the
probability of falling asleep/
1A. .hat happens to an ob%ect during hyper"concentration/
11. 6o( else apart from hyper"concentration might a practitioner
effecti&ely recogni=e a false foul/
1+. .hile in the phase is it permitted to look into the distance for a
long time/
18. .hat is )7 and ho( does the degree of it affect the duration of a
phase e#perience/
1:. .hat should a practitioner al(ays do after an inad&ertent return
into the body/
#asks
1. 7uring the ne#t fe( phases dedicate yourself to the single
goal of maintaining as long as possible using as many
maintaining techni2ues as you can.
+. Figure out (hich techni2ues ha&e pro&en the most effecti&e
and comfortable for you so that you may use these later.
8. )ncrease the duration of your a&erage phase to at least 8
minutes Fe&aluated ob%ecti&elyG.
Chapter 0 - Pri(ary skills
#7E ESSE+CE O2 P9I,A98 S=I;;S
.hen dealing (ith a fully"reali=ed phase re2uisite kno(ledge is
not limited to entry techni2ues deepening and maintenance of the
state translocation or finding and interacting (ith ob%ects. )n order
to feel comfortable a practitioner has to master or at least acclimate
himself (ith a (hole series of techni2ues to correctly react in any
number of situations. For e#ample a practitioner needs to kno( ho(
to create &ision if it is absent. 1ctions including passage through a
(all or taking flight in a deep phase do not happen easily although
these actions may be assumed natural occurrences since the phase
e#ists apart from the physical (orld. )n addition to techni2ues that
allo( interaction (ith the physical setting and surroundings of the
phase methods must learned and applied to counteract fear if it
forces a practitioner to consciously and consistently lea&e the phase.
1 practitioner does not ha&e to kno( all the primary skills by heart
but it is necessary to pay close attention to some of them- emergency
return creation of &ision translocation through ob%ects contact (ith
animate ob%ects and for many skills dedicated to fighting fear (ill
also pro&e e#tremely rele&ant.
The final choice of methods that re2uire added focus on the part of
the practitioner must be made on the basis of personal e#periences
and problems faced (hile in the phase since different practitioners
often ha&e completely different types of problems.
&ISCE9+I+G #7E P7ASE
Problems (ith phase identification during entry often arise at the
initial stages of studying the phase. 1 practitioner simply cannot
understand (hether or not he or she is already in the phase. This
uncertainty can manifest (hile lying do(n or (hile practicing in
other postures.
)f a practitioner is simply lying do(n physically percei&ing his o(n
body and doing nothing then it is indeed difficult to determine
(hether or not he is present in the phase. )t is sufficient to note that
there might be no signs of a phase state. On the contrary there may
be a host of signs and unusual sensations but they by no means
necessarily indicate the onset of the phase.
The problem of the uncertainty of a phase state is al(ays sol&ed
through actions. )f the practitioner is lying do(n then standard
separation techni2ues may produce indication of phase achie&ement "
in the ma%ority of cases I since such techni2ues may often be
incorrectly performed.
)t is possible to perform techni2ues that are only achie&able in the
phase state. )f a practitioner stands up and does not recogni=e his
surroundings then it can be assumed that the practitioner is standing
up in the phase. 6o(e&er often based on the obser&ation that
!e&erything is as in reality$ a practitioner may stand up and note that
e&erything is in fact !as in reality$ simply because the practitioner is
still in !reality$. )n ans(er to this dilemma the phenomenon of
hyper"concentration has been pre&iously mentioned in relation to
maintaining phase. 5y using hyper"concentration it is al(ays
possible to ascertain (hether the practitioner is in the phase.
6o(e&er as a rule hyper"concentration is rarely necessary. Most
often the follo(ing signs indicate that separation has occurred in the
phase- unusual sensations in the body during mo&ement e#treme
tightness during mo&ement a strong physical urge to lie back do(n
dis%ointedness of surroundings and blurred or complete absence of
&ision.
Often the problem resides in the use of direct techni2ues (here the
practitioner e#pects fast results and attempts to determine (hether the
phase has been achie&ed. 1s a principle this should not be done.
.hen using direct techni2ues the phase manifests itself clearlyJ
therefore if an attempt to determine its presence is made it is an
indicator that the phase is 2uite likely still far off.
E,E9GE+C8 9E#49+D PA9A;8SIS
4tatistics sho( that in one"third of initial phase e#periences a
practitioner is faced (ith a degree of fear that forces a return to the
body. Periodically e&en e#perienced practitioners face situations that
re2uire an abrupt return to (akefulness. This presents a number of
concerns.
)n and of itself returning to the body is almost al(ays
unproblematicJ remembering and thinking about the body often
suffices and (ithin moments the practitioner is returned to the body
from (hate&er location in the phase. 1dmittedly it is ad&isable
during this type of situation to shut the eyes and abstain from
touching anything. 1s a rule (hen these actions are performed
simply standing up in the physical (orld is all that is re2uired to
complete a returnJ ho(e&er this is not al(ays simply achie&ed.
4ometimes after reentering the body the practitioner suddenly
reali=es that physical functionality has ceased due to the onset of
sleep paralysis or the sensation that the body has been s(itched off.
7uring sleep paralysis it is impossible to scream call for help or
e&en mo&e a finger. )n the ma%ority of cases it is also impossible to
open the eyes. From a scientific point of &ie( this is a case of an
abrupt unnatural interruption of the rapid eye mo&ement FREMG
phase of sleep during (hich this paralysis is al(ays present and it
can persist for some time after the phase is interrupted.
This is (here it gets interesting. People in the physical (orld are
accustomed to an important rule- if you (ish to achie&e something
then do it and do it as acti&ely as possible. This rule though good is
not al(ays applicable to certain conditions linked to the phase and
applies least of all to e#iting the phase. 4ometimes e#treme effort
makes it possible to break through sleep paralysis and resume
mo&ement though most of these efforts tend to e#acerbate
immobility.
7ue to the unusual nature of a negati&e situation follo(ing a
deliberate fear"induced return to the body the depth of the phase
may greatly increase because of the bodyDs natural protecti&e
inhibition of functions originating in the cerebral corte#J this results
in e&en greater agitation greater fear. The paralysis gro(s stronger.
This is a &icious circle that leads to unpleasant feelings and emotions
(hich may e&aporate any desire to practice the phase.
)gnorance of correct procedures has led to the (idespread opinion
that such ad&erse situations may make it impossible to come back
from the phase at all. These opinions suppose that it is therefore
dangerous to get in&ol&ed (ith the practice. 6o(e&er the solution to
this problem rests in &ery simple actions and procedures that can
pre&ent a large number of negati&e e#periences-
Co(plete 9ela-ation
)n the section on deepening and maintaining it (as noted that the
more acti&e a practitioner is (hile in the phase the better.
,on&ersely if there is less acti&ity the 2uality of the phase declines
allo(ing for an easy e#it. Thus in order to lea&e the phase the
practitioner only needs to completely rela# and ignore any percei&ed
sensations actions or thoughts. 1 practitioner may also recite a
prayer mantra or rhyme since that helps the consciousness to be
distracted from the situation more 2uickly. Of course one needs to
calm do(n and try to get rid of the fear (hich in and of itself is
capable of keeping such a state going. Periodically the practitioner
should try to mo&e a finger in order to check (hether attempts at
rela#ation ha&e had an effect.
Concentration on a 2inger
1 practitioner e#periencing sleep paralysis should try mo&ing a
finger or a toe. 1t first this (onDt (ork but the practitioner has to
concentrate precise thought and effort on the action. 1fter a little
(hile the physical finger (ill begin to mo&e. The problem (ith this
techni2ue is that the practitioner may accidentally start making
phantom motions instead of physical mo&ements (hich is (hy an
understanding of the difference bet(een the t(o sensations is
necessary since it is often not &ery ob&ious.
Concentration on Possible ,o>e(ents
The physiology of sleep paralysis the phase state and dreams are
such that (hen the practitioner is in one of these states some actions
are al(ays associated (ith mo&ements made in the real body. This is
true (hen mo&ing the eyeballs the tongue or (hile breathing. )f the
practitioner concentrates attention on these processes it is possible
counteract inhibitions to physical mo&ementJ as a result a sleep"
paraly=ed practitioner (ill become able to mo&e in reality.
9ee>aluating the Situation
Under normal circumstances deliberate e#it from the phase is not
the norm. 7eliberate e#it is commonly caused by certain fears and
pre%udices. )f a practitioner is not able to acti&ate the body using
other emergency return techni2ues a careful consideration the
possibilities offered by the phase is recommended. There are many
interesting and useful things that can be e#perienced in the phase.
.hy ruin the possibility of great opportunity because of a baseless
fear/
To be fair it must be noted that emergency e#it techni2ues do not
al(ays (ork. 1s a rule after a long period of sleep depri&ation or at
the beginning of or in the middle of a nightDs sleep the urge to sleep
is so great that it is difficult to resist the sleep paralysis phenomenon.
)n this respect ree&aluating the situation is highly recommended so
that a practitioner is able to take ad&antage of the situation &ersus
suffering by it. 4leep paralysis is easily transmuted into a phase state
by means of indirect techni2ues.
By the &ay, +no&ing ho& to e#it paralysis is i$portant not only
for practitioners of the phase, since such paralysis occurs even
&ithout the phase for appro#i$ately one-third of the hu$an
population at least once in a lifeti$e( -t usually happens "efore or
after sleep(
2IG7#I+G 2EA9
Fear in the phase is a &ery common occurrence. The practitioner
may e#perience fear at any stage although it is e#pressed much more
clearly during initial practice. The causes of fear are &ery di&erse- a
feeling that returning to the body is impossibleJ a fear of deathJ
(orrying that something bad is going to happen to the bodyJ
encountering something scary and terrible in the phaseJ painful
sensationsJ o&erly sharp hyper"realistic sensations. One fear
dominates all others- the instinct of self"preser&ation (hich (ithout
any apparent reason can induce a feeling of absolute horror I a
feeling that cannot be e#plained or controlled.
For a no&ice stricken by insurmountable fear that causes
paralysis there is only one (ay to gradually o&ercome. Each time a
no&ice enters the phase an attempt should be made to go a step
further than the pre&ious time. For e#ample in spite of feeling
terrified the practitioner should try to raise the hands and then mo&e
them back to the initial position. The second time the practitioner
should attempt to sit do(n. The third time standing up should be
attempted. The fourth time (alking around in the phase is ad&ised.
Then after incremental steps to(ard e#periencing the harmlessness
of the phase state producti&e calm action may ensue.
Interesting fact!
Fear itself can "e used to enter the phase and re$ain there for a
long ti$e( Once fears are allayed, a cal$ed practitioner is
e#periences increased difficulty &ith entry into the phase(

For a practitioner (ho faces periodical fears reali=ing that there is
no real danger encourages progress in practice. Urges to rapidly
return to the body are then made baseless. 4ooner or later calmer
thought dominates e&ents in the phase and fear happens less often.
.hen dealing (ith momentary fear caused by e&ents in the phase
the simplest solution is to tackle it head"on and follo( through to the
end in order to a&oid a fear"dri&en precedent. )f a practitioner al(ays
runs a(ay from undesirable e&ents the e&ents (ill occur more and
more fre2uently. )f a practitioner is incapable of facing fear in the
phase it is best to use the translocation techni2ue to tra&el else(here
although this solution only produces temporary relief.
C9EA#IO+ O2 ?ISIO+
9ision is often a&ailable at the &ery beginning of a phase
especially (hen the practitioner uses image obser&ation and
&isuali=ation techni2ues to enter. 4ometimes &ision appears (ithin
the first fe( seconds. Other times it manifests during the deepening
process. 6o(e&er there are cases (here &ision is not a&ailable and
must be created 2uickly at any cost. 9ision may arri&e as soon as it
is thought about but if this does not occur a special techni2ue is
necessary.
To create &ision a practitioner needs to bring the hands four to si#
inches in front of the eyes and try to detect them through the grayness
or darkness. Peering aggressi&ely and attenti&ely at the minute details
of the palms (ill cause them to appear much like they are being
de&eloped on Polaroid film. 1fter se&eral seconds &ision (ill
become clear and along (ith the palms the surroundings (ill also
become &isible.
Under no circumstances should the physical eyelids be opened.
9ision (ill appear on its o(n and (ill not differ from that of reality
and the physical sensation of opened eyes (ill emerge. )t is possible
to shut the eyes in the phase an infinite number of times e&en
(ithout ha&ing opened them at all since the latter is not needed for
creating &ision. The physical eyelids may be open only (hile
e#periencing a &ery deep phase. )n a shallo( phase opening the eyes
(ill cause a return to (akefulness.
The practitioner must also keep in mind that &ision should only
be created after a complete separation from the body and a
subse2uent translocation has been achie&ed. 1ttempting to &ie( the
hands during flight or (hile ho&ering in an unidentified space leads
to arbitrary translocation.
CO+#AC# )I#7 ;I?I+G OBGEC#S
T(o problems may surface (hile con&ersing (ith animate ob%ects
in the phase- silence or a return to the body. )n &ie( of the fact that
many phase applications are based on contact (ith people for one
purpose or another it is necessary to understand ho( to correctly
manage contact (ith li&ing ob%ects.
)n order to a&oid a foul Fe%ection from the phase into realityG the
elementary rules of !maintaining$ must be obser&ed. 1cti&ely
obser&ing the facial features or clothing of a person you (ant to
communicate (ith. .hile communicating the practitioner should
constantly rub the hands together or maintain strong &ibrations by
straining the brain. Remember to perform the techni2ues to a&oid
becoming absorbed in communication.
1 more comple# problem is o&ercoming the communicati&e
unresponsi&eness of ob%ects in the phase. )n many cases the speech
of an ob%ect is blocked by the internal stress of the practitioner.
4ometimes the problem stems from an e#pectation that an ob%ect (ill
not be able to communicate in the phase.
)t is important to treat the ob%ects in a calm manner. There is no
use trying to shout or beat the ob%ect to force communication. On the
contrary it is much more effecti&e to treat the ob%ect gently (ithout
applying pressure. 7o not peer at an ob%ectDs mouth e#pecting
sounds to emerge. )t is better to look else(hereJ taking a passi&e
interest in communication generally yields the best results.
1s a rule the first time that communication (ith a li&ing ob%ect is
successful future attempts go unhindered.
,ommunication methods in the phase are should be no different
than those used in ordinary life- talking facial e#pressions gesturing
(ith the hands body language. Telepathy is not necessary.
9EA&I+G
Reading te#t in the phase may be accompanied by a number of
difficulties. First small print becomes illegible because the affects of
hyper"concentration may distort te#t. This problem is sol&ed by using
large"font te#tual sources of information. For e#ample the te#t of a
normal book blurs (hen obser&ed too attenti&ely but the large font
on the co&er of a book is easily read since its si=e is sufficient for
rapid reading (ithout detailed scrutiny.
The second problem encountered (hile reading in the phase is
(hen te#t is legible but is completely meaningless in compositionJ
gibberish. This problem is sol&ed by turning o&er the pages looking
for a readable message. )t is also possible to find another copy or
create it ane( using the ob%ect"finding techni2ues. The same applies
to cases (here the te#t is seen as a set of incomprehensible symbols
or signs.
.hile reading in the phase the practitioner should not forget
about performing !maintaining$ techni2ues to pre&ent a foul by
becoming too rela#ed.

?IB9A#IO+S
The phase is often accompanied by an unforgettably unusual
sensation that may be used successfully to enter deepen or maintain
the phase. )t is difficult to describe it better than the sensation of a
hea&y current passing through the entire body (ithout causing any
pain. )t may also feel like the (hole body is contracting or a tingling
sensation similar to numbness. Most often the sensations are similar
to high"fre2uency &ibrations of the body (hich e#plains the origin of
the term !&ibration$.
)f the practitioner is not sure (hether or not he e#perienced
&ibrations then there is a good method to sol&e his problem- if he
really did he (ill not ha&e any doubts about it. )n all other cases
(hen there are doubts and uncertainty the practitioner is definitely
not dealing (ith &ibrations or is dealing (ith another form thereof.
)f you ha&e e#perienced &ibrations at least once the recollection of
these sensations helps greatly during the simultaneous application of
indirect techni2ues. They are created supported and strengthened by
straining the brain or tensing the body (ithout using the muscles. For
&ibrations to appear it often suffices merely to think about them.
7uring the first e#perience one should e#periment (ith them for a
(hile by rolling them around the body and its parts as (ell as
strengthening and (eakening them.
0o&ever, one should not thin+ that the presence of vi"rations is a
necessary condition for "eing in the phase( Many no&ices often stri&e
not for the phase but for &ibrations after (hich the former must
supposedly follo(. That should not be the case. There are indeed
specific techni2ues that make it possible to get into the phase by
creating &ibrations but in all other cases they are not necessary and
some practitioners may ne&er ha&e them at all.
#EC7+I<4ES 2O9 #9A+S;OCA#I+G
#79O4G7 OBGEC#S
)n a deep phase the properties of the surrounding en&ironment
become &ery similar to the physical (orld. 6o(e&er it may
sometimes be necessary to pass through a (all or translocate to a&oid
a physical barrier in the phase. There are t(o basic options for
passing through barriers like (alls. Usually mastering these re2uires
se&eral attempts.
Interesting fact!
-f a practitioner concentrates on the physical
sensations associated &ith passing through a &all,
it is possi"le to get stuc+( % practitioner $ay even
e#perience the feeling of o"structed "reathing &hen
this happens( %t such a ti$e it is necessary to
return to the "ody(
9apid &efocused Penetration
Run or %ump at a (all (ith a burning desire to penetrate it. 7onDt
focus on the (allJ instead concentrate on the immediate
surroundings. 7o not try to take anything from the current location
since this may impede a successful passage through the (all.
#he Closed Eyes #echni$ue
.hen approaching a (all the practitioner must close his eyes and
completely focus on a desire to pass through it (hile imagining that
the (all does not e#ist or that it is transparent and penetrable.
4urface resistance should be pressed through continuing on (ith the
aggressi&e desire and concentration.
2;IG7#
Taking flight in the phase is a simple matter of remembering past
dreams of flight. 'othing needs to be tensed no (ord need to be
said. 1ttempting flight (ith closed eyes produces a high rate of
success but presents an increased probability of inad&ertent
translocation.
)f a flight attempt is unsuccessful a practitioner may try %umping
from a high ele&ation or from a (indo(. The natural instinct of
dream flight takes o&er and the fall becomes a controlled flight.
6o(e&er %umping from (indo(s or other ele&ations is ad&isable
only to practitioners (ith e#perience since no&ices may not al(ays
be able to determine (hether they are in the phase or in reality.
1nother (ay to fly is to try to suspend oneself in the air (hen
%umping up.
S4PE9-ABI;I#IES
The realism of the phase space does not impose limits on the
ability to perform actions that cannot be performed in the physical
(orld. )t is important to remember that only a practitionerDs
apprehension places limits on (hat may be done in the phase.
For e#ample if a practitioner needs to get to a location " e&en
&ery far a(ay " it may be reached by teleportation. )f an ob%ect needs
to be mo&ed from one side of the room to the other it may be mo&ed
by telekinesis. One of the ma%or benefits of the phase e#perience is
unencumbered freedom of action.
To master unusual abilities only a fe( phases need to be spent in
concentrated de&elopment of the methods.
#elekinesis
)n order to learn telekinesis Fmo&ing ob%ect by thoughtG the
practitioner concentrate on an ob%ect (hile e#periencing a deepened
phase and attempt to mo&e the ob%ect by thinking about the
mo&ement. The only re2uired action is aggressi&e &isuali=ation of the
ob%ectDs mo&ement. 'o specific e#ternal actions are re2uired.
Telekinetic ability is inherent to e&ery human being. )f attempts are
unsuccessful at first press on. 5efore too long the full effect of the
practitionerDs (ill yield results. Using this ability helps to encourage
a good phase e#perience by pro&iding a tool for carrying out planned
tasks.
Pyrokinesis
)gniting an ob%ect in the phase %ust by staring at it re2uires a
strong desire to heat up and set fire to the ob%ect. Performed
successfully an ob%ect (ill smoke distort darken and then burst into
flames.
#elepathy
To de&elop telepathy in the phase it is necessary to peer at
animate ob%ects (hile listening surrounding e#ternal and internal
sounds (ith the intention of hearing thoughts e#pressed by thought.
E&en e#perienced practitioners encounter difficulty (hile de&eloping
telepathy but (hen successful contact (ith people in the phase is
substantially simplified. Using telepathy discerning the thoughts of
people animals and ob%ects is possible. 6o(e&er this should not be
taken too seriously since it is merely the nature of the phase to
simulate (hat is e#pected.

#rans(utation
Transforming an ob%ectDs form re2uires the techni2ue of
transmutation Frefer to ,hapter @G. )t should also be noted that if the
goal is not to con&ert something but rather to transform oneself then
it is necessary to use the translocation techni2ues Falso described in
,hapter @G (hereby attention has to be concentrated not on the
desired place but on the desired form. 6ere again there are no
limitations apart from indi&idual courage and fantasy. )t is possible to
become a butterfly or a dinosaur. )t is possible to become a bird or a
(orm. )tDs e&en possible to become a child or a person of the
opposite se#. These are not simply e#ternal changes but real
transmutations (ithin and (ithout. )f a practitioner becomes a
butterfly it accompanies the sensation of ha&ing (ings many legs
and an unusual body. The practitioner (ill intuiti&ely kno( ho( to
control each part of this ne( body. This is a superficial description of
the transmutation e#perience (hich ob&iously defies a customary
understanding of reality.
#7E I,PO9#A+CE O2 CO+2I&E+CE
1 crucial factor in de&eloping phase abilities is self"confidence in
the ability to use the skills. )nitially these abilities are absent because
the human brain tuned in to ordinariness blocks confidence in the
ability to do anything unusual. 1s soon as strong confidence is
reached in the performance of phase abilities all others become easy
to achie&e.
1lthough confidence in phase abilities may gro( strong
practitioners should remain soundly a(are that abilities in the phase
are limited to the phase. 1ttempting telekinesis pyrokinesis or
transmutation in the real (orld is a (aste of time and energy.

CO+#9O;;I+G PAI+
1long (ith all the positi&e e#periences and sensations that may
be en%oy in the phase painful e#periences nature may also manifest.
Punching a (all in a deep phase state (ill cause the same pain as if a
(all had been struck in physical reality.
4ome actions in the phase may una&oidably cause unpleasant
feelings of painJ therefore it is necessary to kno( ho( to a&oid
painful actions. Focusing on an internal confidence that pain (ill not
result from an action (ill alle&iate the problem. 1 practitioner may
e#periment (ith this type of focus by pummeling a (all (hile
resol&ing that there is no pain. )f the e#periment succeeds then
obtaining the same result (ill ne&er again re2uire the same le&el of
effortJ thinking that the phase is painless (ill suffice.
,O9A; S#A+&A9&S I+ #7E P7ASE
From the &ery beginning it should be understood that the moral
compass of phase space has nothing in common (ith the properties
and la(s in the physical (orld that promulgate reality. The phase
space seemingly imitates the physical (orld (ith all its properties
and functions only because (e are used to percei&ing it and are not
e#pecting anything else. Moral principles and rules apply only to the
place (here these ha&e been. )t does not make sense to follo( the
same rules (hile in the phase.
The practitioner should not refrain from certain actions in the
phase because some (ould be unacceptable improper or bad in the
real (orld. These are merely beha&ioral patterns that are unfounded
in the (orld of the phase (here e&erything operates on the basis of
entirely different la(s.
The only moral rules that might e#ist in the phase are those that the
practitioner establishes. )f desired complete unhindered freedom
may be e#perienced.
S#4&8I+G POSSIBI;I#IES A+& SE+SA#IO+S
'o&ice practitioners should not immediately rush to(ards a single
specific goal if long"term practice is desired. )t is better to
e#tensi&ely in&estigate the phase and its surroundings before
focusing on accomplishment. This (ill build intimacy (ith the
e#perience and allo( unhindered entry and interaction (ith the
phase.
1s in reality learning (hate&er first re&eals itself is the key to
increasing and speciali=ing kno(ledge. 1 beginning practitioner
should at first en%oy the simple fact of actually being in the phase
then lean its details and functions. Once inside the phase a
practitioner should e#plore it e#amining and interacting (ith
e&erything encountered.
6e should also try to fully sharpen all the possible feelings in the
phase in order to fully understand ho( unusual the phase is in its
realism. 1 practitioner must e#perience mo&ement- (alking running
%umping flying falling s(imming. Test the sensations of pain by
striking a (all (ith a fist. The simplest (ay to e#perience taste
sensations is to get to the refrigerator and try to eat e&erything that
you find there at the same time not forgetting to smell each item.
.alk through the (alls translocate create and handle ob%ects.
E#plore. 1ll these actions are &ery interesting in and of themsel&es.
The possibilities really are infinite. 6o(e&er only (hen they are
(ell understood and thoroughly e#plored can it be said that the
practitioner really kno(s (hat the phase is about.
#8PICA; ,IS#A=ES )I#7 P9I,A98 S=I;;S
.hen trying to discern (hether or not a phase is intact a
%udgment is based on a similarity to the departed physical
en&ironment. )n the phase physical attributes are simulations.
6yper"concentrating on an ob%ect for too short a time (hile trying
to determine (hether the surroundings are in the phase or in the
physical (orld.
7eliberately attempting to end the phase prematurely (hen the
entire natural length of the phase should be taken ad&antage of.
Panic in case of paralysis instead of calm rela#ed action.
Refusal to practice the phase because of fear though this problem
is temporary and resol&able.
Opening the eyes at the initial stages of the phase since this
fre2uently leads to a foul.
Premature attempts to create &ision in the phase (hereas
separating from the body and deepening should occur.
E#cessi&e haste (hile creating &ision although in the ma%ority of
cases &ision appears naturally.
.hile concentrating on the hands to create &ision doing so at an
e#cessi&e distance &ersus the recommended four to si# inches.
Forgetting about the techni2ues for !maintaining$ (hile in
contact (ith li&ing ob%ects.
Forgetting to shut the eyes or defocusing &ision (hen
translocating through (alls or other solid ob%ects.
7esiring to do something superhuman in the phase (ithout the
re2uired internal desire and confidence.
Fear of e#periencing pain in the phase instead of learning to
control it.
Obser&ing moral standards in the phase (hen they do not apply.
1 tendency to immediately use the phase for something practical
instead of first thoroughly e#ploring and interacting (ith the
surroundings.
E-ercises for Chapter 0
<uestions
1. 1re there skills in the phase that must first be mastered before
the phase may be used to its full e#tent/
+. )s it possible to understand (hether a phase is intact by
attempting to fly/
8. 6as a practitioner most likely gotten up in the phase or in
reality if there are doubts about this/
:. )s it sufficient to think about the body in order to return to it
and is it only re2uired to return into the body in order to control
it/
;. .hich arm should be acti&ely and aggressi&ely mo&ed to
o&ercome sleep paralysis/
<. )s it possible to tell %okes to oneself to o&ercome sleep
paralysis/
>. )s it possible to mo&e the physical eyes (hile in the phase/
?. .hat should be done if sleep paralysis cannot be o&ercome/
@. ,an sleep paralysis occur (ithout practicing the phase/
1A. .hat if fear is not addressed and con2uered/
11. )s it possible to gradually master the phase in order to
o&ercome fear/
1+. )s there cause for fear of anything in the phase/
18. 1t (hat point can &ision be created in the phase by opening
the eyelids and not through the use of special techni2ues/
1:. .hat (ould happen (ith an attempt to open the eyes after
sitting up in bed i.e. before becoming completely separated from
the phase/
1;. .hy may contact (ith li&ing ob%ects in the phase cause a
return to the body/
1<. .hat problems might occur if a practitioner studies the mouth
of a talking ob%ect/
1>. )n the phase ho( 2uickly can small te#t be read/
1?. .hich is easier to read in the phase- te#t in a ne(spaper or
te#t on a large billboard/
1@. )s it possible to see hieroglyphs instead of te#t (hile reading
in the phase/
+A. )s it possible to burst through a (all after running up to it (ith
the eyes shut/
+1. .hich muscles of the body must be tensed to start flying in
the phase/
++. 1re there any e#trasensory abilities that are inaccessible in the
phase/
+8. ,an a practitioner transform into a ball (hile in the phase/
+:. 6o( does pain in the phase differ from pain in the physical
(orld/
+;. 4hould a practitioner gi&e up a seat to an elderly person (hile
in the phase/
+<. 7ue to moral considerations (hat is prohibited in the phase/
#asks
1. 7uring your ne#t phase session (alk around your home
in&estigating the rooms kitchen and bathroom in detail.
+. 0earn to pass through (alls. ,ompletely dedicate one long
phase e#perience to perfecting this skill.
8. 0earn to fly in the phase.
:. .hile in a deep phase learn to control pain by hitting a (all
(ith your fist.
;. .hile in the phase learn telekinesis Fthe ability to mo&e
ob%ects by thoughtG and pyrokinesis Fsetting ob%ects on fire also
performed by thoughtG.
<. 7edicate a lengthy phase e#perience to an e#periment (ith
&ision- create it if it is not already a&ailable and then shut your
eyes and recreate &ision. 7o this at least ten times o&er the course
of a single phase
>. 3et ob%ects in the phase to start talking.
?. 7edicate a long phase to searching for different kinds of te#ts
in order to e#periment (ith reading &arious si=e fonts.
Chapter 1 - #ranslocation and 2inding Objects
#7E ESSE+CE O2 #9A+S;OCA#IO+
A+& 2I+&I+G OBGEC#S
0ike e&eryday reality the phase space cannot be used for certain
purposes if it is not kno(n ho( to mo&e around and find necessary
things. )n a (akeful state it is more or less kno(n (here something
is located and ho( to reach it. )n the phase the same assumptions
cannot apply since phase mechanisms (ork by different principles.
The reason for addressing translocation and finding ob%ects in the
same chapter is because both techni2ues rely on the same mechanics
that make the e#istence of these techni2ues possible. )n other (ords
the same methods " (ith minor e#ceptions " can be applied to both
translocation and finding.
1fter studying the techni2ues described in this chapter a
practitioner in the phase (ill be able to go to any location and find
any ob%ect. The only limitations that e#ist are those of the
imagination and desireJ if these are unlimited so are the possibilities.
Regarding translocation attention should not be focused on
methods for tra&elling through nearby spaces. For e#ample a
practitioner may simply (alk into an ad%acent room or out to the
street &ia the corridor or through the (indo(. These are natural easy
actions. 1 practitioner should instead concentrate attention on ho( to
mo&e to remote destinations that cannot be 2uickly reached by
physical means.
)t is important to mention the necessary safety procedures for
translocation. 4ometimes due to a lack of e#perience a practitioner
may mistake the phase for reality and reality may be mistaken for the
phase. Mistaking the phase for reality implies no danger since a
practitioner simply belie&es that an entry attempt (as unsuccessful.
6o(e&er if reality is mistaken for the phase a practitioner may
perform dangerous or e&en life"threatening actions. For e#ample
after getting out of bed in a (akeful state thinking that e&erything is
happening in the phase a beginner may approach a (indo( and %ump
out of it e#pecting to fly as is customary in the phase. For this
reason alone shortcuts to flight should only be taken after gaining a
le&el of e#perience that makes it possible to unambiguously
distinguish the phase from a (akeful state.
)f a glitch occurs (hen practicing translocation techni2ues Ffor
e#ample landing in the (rong placeG a practitioner should simply
repeat the techni2ue until the desired result is obtained. Either (ay
initial training is a must in order to make e&erything easier for you
later on.
1s far as ob%ect"finding techni2ues are concerned these are used
for both inanimate and animate ob%ects. )n other (ords these
techni2ues are e2ually effecti&e for finding for e#ample a person or
a utensil. 6o(e&er there are se&eral techni2ues that are only suitable
for finding li&ing ob%ects.
BASIC P9OPE9#8 O2 #7E P7ASE SPACE
1ll methods for controlling the phase space stem from a primary
la(- the degree of changeability of the phase space is in&ersely
proportionate to the depth of the phase and the stability of its ob%ects.
That is the deeper and more stable the phase the more difficult it is
to perform something unusual in it because in a deep stable phase
the la(s of it begin to closely resemble those of the physical (orld.

1ll translocation and finding ob%ects techni2ues are based on the
kno(ledge of methods that bypass the primary la(. The secret lies in
the fact that not only phase depth affects the controllability of the
phase but so does phase stability (hich in turn depends to a large
e#tent on the number of sensations e#perienced in the phase. The
techni2ues for translocation and finding ob%ects are used (hen these
e#perienced sensations are (eakened through certain actions.
)n other (ords if a practitioner located in the phase holds a red
pencil and e#amines it tactile and &isual perceptions are engaged
(hich under sharp agitation cause the ob%ect to e#ist in its complete
form. 6o(e&er as soon as the eyes are shut the stability of pencil
image (eakens. )n this situation it (ill be enough for the practitioner
Fafter sufficient trainingG to concentrate on belie&ing that the pencil is
dark"blue in order for it to appear dark blue after opening the eyes.
This phenomenon occurs because the color of the pencil is no longer
determined by perceptual areas of the brain and therefore it is
possible to change it.
)f a red pencil is placed on a table and the practitionerDs eyes are
shut and there is concentration on a thought that the pencil is no
longer on the table then after opening the eyes the practitioner (ill
find that the pencil has disappeared. )n essence (hen the pencil is
lying on the table and the practitionerDs eyes are closed and the
pencil is not being held no perception is being in&ested in the pencil
(hich the practitioner deletes using autosuggestion.
Using certain techni2ue"related methods a practitioner may cause
the stability of the phase state to remain in flu# using techni2ues that
best suit the practitionerDs indi&idual personality.
#EC7+I<4ES 2O9 #9A+S;OCA#IO+
#ranslocation through #eleportation
This is one of the simplest and most accessible techni2ues that
beginners should use right a(ay. To apply it shut the eyes Fif &ision
is presentG and then concentrate attention on a thought"form or image
of a location else(here in the phase. 1t this moment there (ill be a
string sensation of s(ift flight and (ithin t(o to 1A seconds the
destination (ill be reached.
The success of this techni2ue depends on a strong concentration
upon a single goal- the desired location. Practice must be performed
&ery clearly confidently aggressi&ely and (ithout distractions. 1ny
unrelated thoughts ha&e a profoundly negati&e influence on the
performance of this techni2ue. They unnecessarily prolong the flight
cause a foul or result in arri&ing at an undesired location.
#ranslocation through a &oor
)n order to use this techni2ue approach any door (ith the strong
belief that it leads to the re2uired location. 1fter opening the door
the practitioner (ill see and be able to step into the destination. )f the
door (as originally open it must be completely shut before applying
the techni2ue.
1 dra(back to this techni2ue is that its practice al(ays re2uires a
door. )f there is no door users of this translocation techni2ue should
create one using an ob%ect finding techni2ue.
#ranslocation through #eleportation 6ith the Eyes Open
This techni2ue is difficult because it re2uires an unstable phase
space caused by a strong desire to translocate to another location.
7uring teleportation by teleportation (ith eyes shut the practitioner
disengages from the current location. .hereas during teleportation
by flight (ith eyes shut the practitioner disentangles himself from the
current location that is not the case here. Therefore this techni2ue
should be used only by e#perienced practitioners (ho are confident
that they are capable of remaining in the phase.
1s far as implementing the techni2ue is concerned the practitioner
simply needs to stop and concentrate on the thought that he is already
present in the desirable location and focus on its image. )t is
important to not stare at or touch anything during the thought.
4urrounding space (ill dim blur and then disappear during this time
and then the intended location (ill gradually start to appear. The rate
of space metamorphosis depends on the degree of desire to reach the
re2uired location.
)f concentration is (eak or phase depth is poor then after space
destabili=es it may not be restored " and a return to the (akeful state
(ill occur.
#ranslocation 6ith Closed Eyes
This is one of the easiest techni2ues. To use this techni2ue the
practitioner simply needs to shut the eyes and ha&e an intense desire
that (hen the eyes are ne#t opened the re2uired location (ill be
reached. )n order to considerably increase the effecti&eness of this
techni2ue it (ould be useful to imagine at the moment you close
your eyes that you ha&e already reached the desired location.
Translocation must occur then and it has to happen (ithout the flight
sensations that occur during teleportation (ith closed eyes.
Translocation must occur right then and it has to happen (ithout the
flight that occurs in teleportation (ith closed eyes (hich must be
a&oided.
#ranslocation by Concentration on a 9e(ote Object
To perform this techni2ue the practitioner should peer from a
distance at a minor detail of the desired location. The greater an
intention to see an ob%ectDs detail the 2uicker the arri&al at the
ob%ectDs location.
1 dra(back to this techni2ue is that this type of translocation is
possible only for places that are already &isible albeit from a great
distance.
#ranslocation during Separation
The simplest (ay to translocate is to do so (hile separating from
the body. Employing this techni2ue is e#tremely simple and &ery
con&enient. )t may be combined (ith almost any separation
techni2ue and is performed by focusing on the image and feel of a
desired location during the initial stages of e#iting the body. )t is e&en
better to imagine that phase entry (ill occur and separation (ill
complete in a chosen location.
Interesting fact!
%fter having changed his place of residence, the
practitioner &ill very often continue for so$e ti$e
to separate fro$ the "ody in the sa$e house &here
he &as used to doing this previously(
1 dra(back of this techni2ue is that separation occurs only in the
beginning of the phase e#perience and therefore can only be used
once. Other options should be considered after the first translocation.
#ranslocation by Passing through a )all
This techni2ue is performed by (alking or flying through a (all
(ith the eyes shut and a firm con&iction that the re2uired location is
behind the (all. The barrier does not necessarily ha&e to be a (all. )t
can be any non"transparent ob%ect through (hich a practitioner may
(alk or fly- a screen a (ardrobe and so on.
The main dra(back of this techni2ue is the necessity of
appropriate skills for penetrating through solid ob%ects of the phase.
1nother necessary condition for applying this techni2ue is the
presence of barriers to pass through.
#ranslocation through &i>ing
This techni2ue is identical to passing through (alls (ith the only
difference being instead of a (all " (hich may not al(ays be
a&ailable " the practitioner (ill use the floor or the ground. The
practitioner must di&e headfirst (ith the eyes shut and ha&e complete
confidence that the re2uired location is underneath the solid surface.
The ability to pass through solid ob%ects is naturally also re2uired.
1 practitioner may di&e through the floor or the ground and also
into any flat hori=ontal surface- a table a chair a bed and so forth.
#ranslocation through 9otation
1pply this techni2ue a practitioner in the phase (ill to start
rotating on an a#is (hile simultaneously concentrating on a belief
that a desired location (ill be reached once rotation is stopped. The
eyes must be shut during the rotation or &ision must not be focused
on anything in particular. 1s a rule t(o to fi&e re&olutions on an a#is
are sufficient. Once again e&erything depends on the ability to fully
concentrate on a desired goal (ithout any distractions.
OBGEC# 2I+&I+G #EC7+I<4ES
#echni$ue of #ranslocation
1ll translocation techni2ues are also applicable to ob%ect finding
techni2ues since the use of both techni2ues re2uires altering the
surrounding the space. )nstead of concentrating on a location the
practitioner is to focus on the specific detail of a space that is to be
found or changed. 1s a result finding the necessary ob%ect Fpro&ided
this techni2ue has been masteredG is guaranteed but maintaining the
original location (here the action begins is not guaranteed.
)f the goal is to find an ob%ect (hile remaining in the present
location use the speciali=ed techni2ues described later on- techni2ues
that change only a portion of the phase space.
2inding by Calling a +a(e
This techni2ue is only used to find li&ing ob%ects. The practitioner
must call a person or an animal by name to cause the animate phase
resident to enter or appear nearby. The call should be loud nearly a
shout other(ise it (ill not al(ays (ork. 3enerally it is often enough
to pronounce a name se&eral times to achie&e results.
)f the desired animate ob%ect does not ha&e a name or the
practitioner does not kno( it then any name or general summoning
(ill do like !,ome hereH$ This should be done (hile mentally
focusing on a clear image of the desired person or animal.
2inding by In$uiry
To perform this techni2ue approach any person in the phase and
ask him For herG (here to 2uickly find a desired ob%ect. 1n accurate
ans(er is usually gi&en straight a(ay and it should be follo(ed.
6o(e&er to a&oid (asting time do not forget to mention that the
ob%ect must be found !2uickly$ or specify that the ob%ect should be
!nearby$. 7uring this communication under no circumstances should
there be a doubt about the accuracy of the information since
other(ise it may lead to a simulation of (hat is e#pected.
The dra(back of this techni2ue is that it re2uires the presence of
an animate person and good skill at communicating (ith ob%ects in
the phase (hich can pro&e difficult.
2inding by #urning Around
)n order to use this techni2ue the practitioner must concentrate
and imagine that the re2uired ob%ect is located some(here behind his
back and after turning around he (ill actually see it there e&en if it
(as not there %ust a moment earlier. This (orks best if the
practitioner prior to turning around did not &ie( the place (here the
ob%ect is e#pected to appear.
2inding Around a Corner
.hen approaching any corner concentrate and imagine the
re2uired ob%ect is %ust around the corner. Then after turning the
corner the ob%ect (ill be found. 1nything that limits space &isibility
may be regarded as a corner. This does not ha&e to be the corner of a
house or another type of buildingJ it could be the corner of a
(ardrobe the corner of a truck etc.
The dra(back of this techni2ue is that it re2uires the a&ailability
of a sufficiently large corner that blocks the &ie( of anything around
the other side of it.
2inding in the 7and
This techni2ue is in essence only applicable to finding ob%ects
that can fit in or be held by the hand. To perform this techni2ue
concentrate on the idea that the ob%ect is already in hand. 1t that
moment the practitioner must not look at it. 4oon after beginning to
concentrate on this idea the practitioner (ill at first feel a slight
sensation of the ob%ect lying in his hand follo(ed by a full sensation
and appearance of the desired ob%ect.
2inding by #rans(utation
This techni2ue distorts the phase space (hile not completely
disengaging a perception of the space. The practitioner must gi&e
strong attention to a thought that a re2uired ob%ect is going to appear
in a desired location. There must be sufficient confidence that the
practitionerDs desires (ill be reali=ed. 1t this moment the process of
metamorphosis (ill begin- space (ill distort and dim and the
re2uired ob%ect (ill begin to manifest itself. 1fter this brightness and
focus (ill be restored (ith necessary alterations made present in the
phase space.
This techni2ue is relati&ely difficult to perform in comparison to
others and therefore it is better to use it only after a high le&el of
e#perience has been reached because it is difficult to remain in the
phase during any metamorphic process.
1s is e&ident in the name of this techni2ue it can be used to find
ob%ects and also create ne( ob%ects from found ob%ects.

#8PICA; ,IS#A=ES )I#7 #9A+S;OCA#IO+
A+& 2I+&I+G OBGEC#S
1pplying translocation and ob%ect finding techni2ues (ithout the
precondition of a steady phase.
)nsufficient concentration on a desire to tra&el to a location or to
find an ob%ect.
7oubting that results (ill be achie&ed instead of ha&ing complete
confidence.
Passi&e performance of the techni2ues instead of a strong desire
and high le&el of aggression.
Forgetting to repeat translocation or ob%ect finding techni2ues
(hen the techni2ue did not (ork or (orked incorrectly during the
first attempt.
3etting distracted by e#traneous thoughts during the lengthy
process of teleporting (ith eyes shut. Total concentration is re2uired
at all times.
1pplying the techni2ue of teleportation (ith eyes open (ithout
ade2uate e#perience.
Failing to immediately translocate (hen using the closed eyes
techni2ueJ this may induce flying a la the teleportation techni2ue.
3lossing o&er minute details or only obser&ing the broad features
of a remote ob%ect (hile applying translocation by concentration.
1 delayed desire to mo&e (hile translocating during separation.
1n instantaneous desire to immediately mo&e is necessary.
Forgetting to first shut a door completely (hen using
translocation through a doorJ other(ise there (ill be contact (ith
(hat is already behind it.
Using a translocation techni2ue to go through a (all (ithout
kno(ing ho( to pass through solid ob%ects.
Paying too much attention to the process of translocation through
a (allJ this leads to being trapped in the (all.
Forgetting to shut the eyes (hile translocating di&ing headfirst.
The eyes should remain closed until after the techni2ue is complete.
)nsufficient internal association (ith an animate ob%ect (hile
finding it by calling its name.
Trying to find an ob%ect &ia interrogation instead of passi&ely
communicating (ith li&ing ob%ects of the phase.
Using distant corners (hen applying the techni2ue of finding an
ob%ect around the corner. ,hoose nearby corners to a&oid (asting
precious tra&el time.
1pplying transmutation techni2ues (ithout possessing sufficient
e#perience in managing F!maintaining$G the phase space.
<uestions
1. .hat becomes possible (ith the ability to translocate in the
phase/
+. .hat becomes possible (ith the ability to find ob%ects in the
phase/
8. .hat do translocation and finding ob%ects techni2ues ha&e in
common/
:. .hat is the sole limitation on the possibilities offered by
translocation and finding ob%ects/
;. 6o( may one translocate across &ery short distances/
<. .hen the flight techni2ue by %umping out of a (indo( be
attempted/
>. .hat should be done if translocation and ob%ect finding
techni2ues do not yield the re2uired result/
?. )s it possible to find a person from real life using the
techni2ue of finding ob%ects/
@. 7oes the stability of space decrease in a deep phase/
1A. .hat are the fundamental components of space and ob%ect
stability/
11. 6o( large is the role of auditory perception in the stability of
space/
1+. .hat is most important (hile using a teleportation techni2ue/
18. .hat does speed of mo&ement depend on during
teleportation/
1:. 4hould a no&ice apply the techni2ue of teleportation (ith
open eyes/
1;. .hat techni2ue might the translocation (ith closed eyes
techni2ue turn into/
1<. 4hould large or small details be scrutini=ed (hile
translocating by concentration on remote ob%ects/
1>. )s the techni2ue of translocation during separation applied
after separation or (hile beginning to separate/
1?. .hen applying the techni2ue of translocation through a door-
is it better if the door is open or closed/
1@. .hy might translocation by passing through a (all fail/
+A. .hen using translocation by di&ing is it important to be in a
place (here there is something to stand on/
+1. .hile applying the techni2ue of rotation should rotation be
imagined or real/
++. )s it possible to use a translocation techni2ue to attempt
finding ob%ects/
+8. .hen using the techni2ue of calling by name (hat should be
done if the name of a desired person in the phase is unkno(n/
+:. .hile looking for an ob%ect using the method of in2uiry is it
important to specify that the ob%ect needs to be found !2uickly$/
+;. 6o( far back must a turn occur (hen the techni2ue of finding
ob%ects by turning is being used/
+<. .ould the corner of a fence be suitable for applying the
techni2ue of finding ob%ects around the corner/
+>. )s it necessary to shut the eyes (hile using the transmutation
techni2ue/
#asks
1. 7edicate the ne#t three phases to e#periments (ith
translocation techni2ues using all of them and tra&elling
(here&er you (ant.
+. 1fter e#periencing three phases dedicated to translocation
select the techni2ues that (ork best for you.
8. 7uring the ne#t phase tra&el to the Eiffel To(er to the
Moon and to the homes of some of your relati&es.
:. 7edicate the ne#t three phases to e#periments (ith the full
range of techni2ues for finding ob%ects including translocation
techni2ues.
;. 1fter three phases dedicated to finding ob%ects select the
techni2ues that you are most comfortable (ith.
<. )n the ne#t phase that you e#perience find your mother and
then at the same location locate this te#tbook a red globe and a
green rose.
Chapter 3 - Application
#7E ESSE+CE O2 APP;ICA#IO+S
2O9 P7ASE S#A#ES
Phase perception initially causes so much emotion and &ariety of
e#perience that the practitioner is often not concerned (ith the
2uestion of ho( the phase might be purposefully used. The critical
2uestion of application becomes e&en more critical as e#perience
increases. 1pplication of the phase becomes more &i&id against the
background of understanding ho( the phenomenon can pro&ide a
means of gaining information and ne( e#periences.
4ome approach the phase practice (ith a predetermined goal
uninterested in anything else. .ith a specific goal a problem may
arise in the origination of the goal because the phase phenomenon is
(rapped in a thick layer of pre%udices and stereotypes (hich often
ha&e no bearing on the reality. The primary purpose of this chapter is
to precisely separate reality from fiction. )ts second purpose is to
pro&ide a detailed description of (hat may be obtained from the
practice of phase e#periences.
E&ery pro&en and accessible practical application of the phase is
based on three 2ualities- aG application founded on the phaseDs ability
to simulate any ob%ect and any space (ith any properties and
functionsJ bG application based on the opportunity to connect (ith the
subconscious mind in order to obtain informationJ cG application
based on the phaseDs ability to impact a practitionerDs physiology.
Most importantly nothing described in this chapter is difficult to
achie&e. 1ny application may be achie&ed during the &ery first phase
if a practitioner manages to focus and apply the appropriate
techni2ues for translocation or finding ob%ects. Regardless of (hether
the practitioner adheres to a mystical or pragmatic (orld&ie( a full
range of access is inherently possible.
Possible applications of the phenomenon certainly e#ceed the
scope of descriptions related through this chapter. )t is possible that
other applications simply ha&e not been pro&en yet and so far the
correct methods of practicing these unkno(n. Only the practitioner
may determine the limits of possibility (ithin the phase. Of course
common sense should be applied or it (ould be logically and
psychologically difficult to disengage misconceptions. The goal of
this chapter is to provide a real Bthough $ini$al) foundation that is
fir$ and unyielding, &hatever the circu$stance( -f the practitioner
follo&s a strict approach to practice, it &ill "e $uch $ore difficult to
"eco$e lost during further practical and theoretical studies(
APP;ICA#IO+S BASE& O+ SI,4;A#IO+
Many (onder about the nature of the phase state in relation to the
brain i.e. (hether or not the phase is all in oneDs head. 5ut in the
conte#t of applying the phase this is not a &alid concern. Perception
of the entire physical en&ironment is performed through sensory
organs. )n the phase perception is the same sometimes e&en more
realistic. .hether e&erything described in this chapter occurs in
reality or is merely simulated makes no difference in terms of the
encountered sensations.
#ra>elling
%round the &orld' )t is possible to reach any point of the
planet and it is particularly interesting to re&isit places (here the
practitioner once li&ed or &isited and &isit places that the practitioner
has a strong desire to &isit. E&ery sight and beauty of the Earth
become accessible be it the Eiffel To(er or an island in Oceania the
Pyramids of Egypt or 1ngel Falls.
Through Outer Space- 1lthough humankind is not going to
reach Mars any time soon any practitioner may stand on its surface
and e#perience its uni2ue landscape through the use of translocation
in the phase. There is nothing more ama=ing than obser&ing gala#ies
and nebulae planets and stars from the &antage pint of &ast space. Of
all phase applications a&ailable this one pro&ides practitioners (ith
the most striking aesthetic e#periences.
To different places in ti$e' This makes it possible to &isit a
childhood to see (hat a person (ill look like in the futureJ a
pregnant (oman in the phase may see (hat her child (ill look like.
Tra&el far back in time and (itness the construction of the Pyramids
at 3i=a see Paris in the 1>th century (ander among the dinosaurs of
the Curassic period.
Through different &orlds' Tra&el a (orld that has been
described in literature or %ust in&ented by the practitioner de&eloped
in the imagination. These could be e#traterrestrial ci&ili=ations
parallel (orlds or uni&erses from fairy tales and films. 1ny
destination is nearby.
Encounters
5ith relatives' 4ince relati&es cannot al(ays see each other
there is the remarkable possibility to meet each other and talk in the
phase. Of course this does not entail mutual presence. )t is enough
for one person to possess the re2uired desire " the second person may
ne&er e&en kno(. Reali=ing the desire to contact a close relati&e and
e#change information is a treasure.
5ith ac4uaintances' ,ircumstances often pre&ent seeing
people (ho are important. This is an opportunity to reali=e a desire
and finally meet that certain person again.
5ith the dead' Regardless of the nature of the phase
phenomenon nothing else yields the possibility to see talk to and
embrace a deceased lo&ed one. These are &i&id personal e#periences
accessible to e&eryone and achie&ing these encounters does not
re2uire ma%or difficulty. ,ourage is the only necessity. From a
techni2ue"related point of &ie( a stable phase and application of the
finding ob%ects techni2ue sets the stage for (hat at first may seem
impossible. )t should be noted that (hen a deceased person is
encountered in the phase the distortions caused by the ob%ect finding
techni2ue may lead to some &ery undesirable occurrences. )f you are
interested in this sub%ect you should carefully study the guidebook
:ontact &ith the 3eceased Fauthor- Michael RadugaG.
5ith cele"rities' Through the use of ob%ect finding
techni2ues a practitioner has the opportunity to meet any famous
person. This could be a historical persona a contemporary politician
or an artist. )n the phase state they are all accessible for any type of
interaction. For e#ample a practitioner could meet Culius ,aesar
Cesus ,hrist 'apoleon ,hurchill 4talin 6itler El&is Presley
Marilyn Monroe and a great many others.
9ealiHing &esires
E&eryone has dreams. Regardless of (hether they e&er come
true in reality they may at least en%oy be reali=ed in the phase. 4ome
dream of a &isit to 0as 9egas some to dri&e a Ferrari some &isit
Outer 4pace others (ould like to bathe in a pile of money and some
desire se#ual e#periences. 1ll of these may finally be e#perienced in
the phase.
Alternati>e to the ?irtual )orld
)n the phase young men may participate in game battles as if
the battles are real. 1 practitioner can &isit unusual (orlds and places
(hile en%oying completely realistic sensations feel a (eapon in his
hands and e&en the smell of gunpo(der. )f desired e&en the
sensation of battle (ounds may be e#perienced. 3aming possibilities
in the phase are not limited by the po(er of a microprocessor but the
e#tent of a practitionerDs imagination.
Creati>e &e>elop(ent
:reating &or+s of art' Using the methods of ob%ect finding or
translocation an artistic practitioner can purposefully seek an ob%ect
in the phase that may be composed in real life. )f necessary it is
possible to easily return to study an ob%ect in the phase. For e#ample
a painter may find a stunning landscape and puts it to can&as in the
real (orld (hile periodically returning to the same landscape in the
phase.
Fie&ing future co$pleted &or+s of art' )f an artist is in the
process of reali=ing an idea then a preliminarily look at the end result
of a design may be seen in the phase. 1 painter can e#amine a
painting in ad&anceJ a sculptor may see a completed sculpture and an
architect (ill be able to (ander through a house that is still in the
early stages of design. 1ny creati&e (ork can be simulated in the
phase.
% source of inspiration and fantasy' The phase practice
imparts ideas and desires that positi&ely affect creati&e endea&ors.
Furthermore the reali=ation of desires and tra&els through unusual
spaces e&oke great emotions (hich pro&ide e#cellent inspiration.
APP;ICA#IO+S BASE& O+ CO+#AC#
)I#7 #7E S4BCO+SCIO4S ,I+&
1ssume that the phase state is %ust an e#ceptionally unusual state
of brain and that perception (ithin it is no more than an unusually
realistic play of its functions. 1ssume that a practitioner in the phase
decides to tra&el to a forest. To do so the translocation (ith closed
eyes techni2ue is used and as a result a forest appears.
.hat happens if the &ision contains &ery detailed kno(ledge of
forests (hat forests consist of and (here forests originate/ The
brain creates a hyper"realistic space superior to that of e&eryday
reality consisting of millions of blades of grass lea&es hundreds of
trees and a multitude of sounds. Each blade of grass has depth and
build not %ust a point. Each leaf also consists of component parts. 1
uni2ue natural pattern makes up the bark of each tree.
4uddenly a (ind begins to blo( through the forest and millions
of lea&es and blades of grass follo(ing a mathematical model of the
propagation of air masses begin oscillating in a (a&elike fashion.
Thus a certain resource inside us is capable in mere seconds not only
of creating millions of details in the desired scene but also to control
each of those details indi&iduallyH
E&en if the phase is %ust a state of mind this does not mean that
there are no sources of information (ithin it. The mind possesses
great computing ability and is e2uipped to imagine the full e#tent of
the impossible. 'o computer ho(e&er po(erful is capable of similar
feats. 1 practitioner is able to someho( tap into ama=ing resources
(hile in the phase. )t only remains to learn e#actly ho( to achie&e
mastery.
)t is possible that the phase space is go&erned by the subconscious
mind. This means that the practitioner is able to contact the
subconscious (hile in the phase state. 7uring e&eryday life the
subconscious mind sends information based on calculations
determined by enormous capabilities. 6o(e&er humans neither hear
nor percei&e these signals because people are accustomed to
recei&ing information linguistically. The subconscious mind hardly
operates (ithin the limitations of language. ,ommunication (ith the
subconscious mind on a conscious le&el is only possible (ithin the
phase. )f all phase ob%ects are created and controlled by the
subconscious mind then it is possible to use them as translators. For
e#ample (hen talking to a person in the phase normal (ords are
heard (hile the ob%ect and communicated information is controlled
by the subconscious mind.
1n e#planation of ho( information is obtained in the phase can
hardly be une2ui&ocally pro&en. Perhaps there are other undisco&ered
resources. 5ut that is not so important. The most important thing is
definitely kno(n- ho( to obtain information in the phase.
The algorithm for obtaining information from the phase is not
comple#. 1fter entering the phase only the techni2ues for obtaining
information and the methods of &erifying it need to be learned to
increase in kno(ledge gleaned from the phase.
5ased on the pragmatic e#planation of the nature of the phase as
an unusual state of brain controlled by the subconscious it may be
assumed that the amount of information obtained in the phase is
limited. )f the phase e#ists (ithin the confines of the brain then the
brain can only operate on data that has been recei&ed by the brain
o&er the course of its e#istence. )ndeed it appears that e&erything
percei&ed through the sensory organs is remembered and correlated
(ith other dataJ this obser&ation concern conscious and unconscious
perception.
)f any e&ent is actually a conse2uence of other e&ents (hich
(ere in turn also conse2uences of pre&ious happenings then
nothing occurs by chance. The initial data is kno(n " then it is
possible to calculate (hat is implied by it.
1s a result if e&erything is based solely on the resource of the
subconscious mind then information may be obtained about
e&erything that is related to an indi&idual life- the practitionerDs
e#periences and the e#periences of those (ith (hom the practitioner
e#periences life. 0essons are learned from the future and past and the
future and past of others. 1ll in all in order to approach kno(ing the
(hole of the information a&ailable in the phase personal kno(ledge
capacity (ould need to increase by 1AA or e&en 1AAA times.
The only information that is not a&ailable in the phase is that
about (hich the subconscious mind does not ha&e any preliminary
information. For e#ample (here to purchase a (inning lottery ticket
that (ill (in millions of dollars cannot be learned since there is no
data that could support the necessary calculation. The subconscious
mind (ill also not be able to sho( the practitioner (hat a random
street in a small to(n on the other end of the Earth looks like. 1
practitioner should not try guessing (hat information the
subconscious mind has to offer and (hat it doesnDt because mistakes
are easily made. For e#ample if a practitioner has ne&er been to Paris
and ne&er seen the Eiffel To(er it might be assumed that the
practitionerDs subconscious mind kno(s nothing about it either
although through o&er the course of life the mind has already
recei&ed an enormous 2uantity of information from pictures
photographs stories &ideos books and so forth.
There are three basic techni2ues for obtaining information in the
phase. Each of them has its ad&antages and disad&antages that must
be studied and learned before use.
Ani(ate Objects #echni$ueD
To perform this method of obtaining information the practitioner
in a full deep phase must locate a person by techni2ues for finding
ob%ects and procure the necessary information from that person
through the use of simple 2uestions. )f the re2uired information is
linked to a certain person then that person should be located in the
phase. )f the information is not related to anyone in particular then it
is possible to create a uni&ersal information source (hich must be
associated (ith (isdom and kno(ledge. For e#ample this could be a
(ise recluse a (ell"kno(n philosopher or a guru.
The ad&antage of this techni2ue is that it is easy to pose additional
2uestions and it is also easier to &erify (hate&er information is
obtained. 1 dra(back of this techni2ue is that for many it is difficult
to communicate (ith li&ing ob%ects in the phase because of ob%ectsD
unresponsi&eness or a practitionerDs problems (ith maintaining the
phase (hile talking (ith ob%ects.
Inani(ate Objects #echni$ueD
Use techni2ues for finding ob%ects in order to locate information
from sources like inscriptions books or ne(spapers. .hile trying to
locate the source of information remember to concentrate of a belief
that (hat is found (ill ha&e the desired information. 4ource types are
not limited to paper mediaJ e&en radios or tele&isions may be
(atched or listened to and computer search engines and file systems
also may produce results.
1 huge dra(back of this techni2ue is that considerable
complications arise if an additional or a follo("up 2uestion emerges
(hich may cause the practitioner to ha&e to stop and repeat the
searching process.
The upside to this techni2ue is that if a practitioner has problems
communicating (ith animate ob%ects this techni2ue can temporarily
ser&e as a reasonable alternati&e.
Episode #echni$ueD
)n order to recei&e information using this method imagine an
e&ent or series of e&ents that (ill communicate the desired
information. Then mo&e to the area (here predetermined e&ents are
e#pected to take place by using translocation techni2ues. 1fter
arri&ing at the destination use &isual obser&ation to understand (hat
is taking place and the information that the e&ents are
communicating. The episode techni2ue is suitable only for cases
(here information can be obtained by obser&ation.

0o& to verify the infor$ationG The techni2ues for recei&ing
information in the phase are not comple# in and pro&e successful
after %ust a fe( attempts. 6o(e&er as (as already mentioned earlier
the properties of phase spaces that do not fall under the category of
&i&id perception are not particularly stable " not only in terms of
appearance but also in terms of their properties. ,orrectness of
information also depends on the ob%ects themsel&es. The problem
rests in that the practitioner may not be able to properly control the
ob%ect in 2uestion and may recei&e false information.
Interesting fact!
The phase space is not everyday reality@ therefore,
it should not "e treated &ith the nor$al "elief that
every o"servation should "e regarded as fact(
E&en (hen a practitioner has learned to find animate and
inanimate ob%ects (ith an absence of doubt there is still no guarantee
that the recei&ed information is al(ays accurate. 1 fe( techni2ue"
related tricks are able to test an ob%ectDs ability to speak the truth.
For e#ample an ob%ect can talk about something (ith absolute
confidence but that does not mean that (hat it communicates is all
true. )f doubt is e#perienced (hile finding the ob%ect then doubt may
ha&e an effect on (hat the ob%ect says. This is (hy doubt must be
a&oided at all costs " although beginners are bound to initially ha&e
problems (ith this.
To determine (hether an ob%ect is able to gi&e accurate
information a control 4uestion should be askedJ a 2uestion that the
subconscious mind cannot kno( the ans(er to. For e#ample a
practitioner might ask a found ob%ect- !.here can ) buy the (inning
lottery ticket for the Mega 5all %ackpot/$ )f the ob%ect starts
ans(ering such 2uestions seriously going into great detail then the
ob%ect should be created ane( since its properties allo( the
possibility that it (ill lie. 1 proper ob%ect (ill remain silent or say
that it does not kno( the ans(er to the control 2uestion.
1fter accurate information is obtained through the use of a control
2uestion it must be confirmed. This is done by means of a clarifying
4uestion. The practitioner needs to ask the ob%ect (here the
information came from to find out the details that offer proof of the
informationDs authenticity in the real (orld. The ob%ect may also be
asked the same 2uestions more than once pro&ided they are
re(orded. The ans(ers to re(orded 2uestions must be identical.
Remember the more important the nature of the information and
the more serious action it implies the more effort needs to be
in&ested in &erifying it in the real (orld since a certain percentage of
the information is bound to be incorrect despite correct performance
of information"related techni2ues.
APP;ICA#IO+ BASE&
O+ I+2;4E+CI+G P78SIO;OG8
There are three main elements that (ith the help of the phase
may influence the physiology in &ery beneficial (ays. First it is
possible to contact the subconscious mind to learn ho( to influence
physiology. 4econd the brain reacts more strongly to sensations than
to real e&ents. For e#ample if running (hile in the phase the
physical processes of the body (ould be consistent (ith the
processes occurring in the body of a person running in reality-
respiration accelerates blood pressure increases the heartbeat
2uickens and e&en blood flo( to the feet becomes greater. Third
(hile the practitioner e#periences profound changes of consciousness
in the phase this is (hen all direct and indirect forms of
autosuggestion are most effecti&e.
'ot all influences on physiology are 1AAK effecti&e. 6o(e&er
e&en (ithout a guaranteed rate of success the effort to influence
physiology is (orthy of attention because ama=ing results can be
obtained. 1l(ays remember that achie&ing a good result may re2uire
repeated influence from the phase. E&en in the physical (orld
medications re2uire repeated ingestion.
)f the goal is to cure a disease do not rely solely on the phase.
4ick persons must use the phase alongside treatment from physicians.
The more serious the illness the more strongly this rule applies.
Obtaining Infor(ation
The diagnosis of health problems may be performed (ith the
same techni2ues used for obtaining information. )t is also possible to
learn methods to cure health problems if such methods e#ist. 5oth of
these possibilities apply to third parties being helped by efforts in the
phase. )nformation gathering is the only pro&en (ay to influence the
physiology of other people by using the phase. For e#ample it is
possible to find a (ell"kno(n healer in the phase and ask about
personal health problems or the problems of a friend or family
member. 1 clarified ans(er may be used in the assistance of
traditional medical treatment.
Attention fro( &octors
Find a doctor in the phase by using the techni2ue of finding
ob%ects and ask the doctor to take e#amine or treat a kno(n illness or
other health problem. For e#ample in case of abdominal pains the
doctor may palpate the belly apply pressure to &arious points and
perform a special massage. 1ny actions are possible including an
operation. 1fter lea&ing the phase the practitioner (ill feel a positi&e
result.
#aking (edicines
The placebo effect is much stronger in the phase than in reality
since all actions occur in a highly modified state of consciousness
and are percei&ed directly. Ob%ect locating techni2ues may be used to
find medications used to treat e#isting problems. )t is also possible to
create self"made substances to produce the desirable effect. For
e#ample in case of an acute headache in reality a practitioner may
take a painkiller (hile in the phase and its effect (ill be partially felt
in the (akeful state.
&irect Effect
1n illness or problem may be directly affected by actions in the
phase. For e#ample a sore throat may be (armed by en&isioning a
burning sensation in the throat or by mo&ing to a hot location like a
sauna. )f a practitioner (ould like to increase physical fle#ibility
then stretching in the phase (ill cause the body to ad%ust to the
none#istent action by rela#ing and tensing the corresponding tendons
and muscles.
Progra((ing
This is nothing more than normal autosuggestion or auto"training
in the phase (hich is more potent in the phase than reality. 1
practitioner should repeat a desired goal silently or aloud and if
possible should imagine e#periencing the desired result. For
e#ample if the aim is to get rid of depression a practitioner should
attempt to recreate a happy mood in the phase e#periencing it to the
fullest e#tent possible. 4imultaneously silent repetition of a goal (ith
complete understanding and e#pectation that e&erything (ill be
alright that e&erything is (onderful (ill undoubtedly produce the
desired effect.
4seful e-periences
E&erything (ith useful properties in reality should be e#perienced
as useful in the phase since the body (ill react in practically the same
manner. Useful e#periences may include e#ercising going to the
gym ha&ing a massage taking mud or salt baths and e#periencing
pleasant emotions.
Psychology
Practicing phase"related techni2ues fa&orably affects the
psychology because it offers ne( opportunities and e&okes ne(
emotions. 6o(e&er there are specific applications of the phase that
produce differing psychological effects. For e#ample it is possible to
use the phase space as a bridge for dealing (ith phobias by
facilitating a setting (here a practitioner may confront and deal (ith
certain fears. 9arious comple#es may be defeated in a similar
manner. The use of a (ell"kno(n techni2ue called re"&isiting
FrecapitulationG (here a person re"e#periences ad&erse e&ents (hile
trying to relate to them in a ne( (ay has been used successfully in
the phase.
#raining
1ny motor skills can be sharpened by using it in reality and in the
phase because the algorithm of rapid physical action is generated at
the le&el of interaction bet(een areas of the brain that correspond to
muscle action. )n the phase (restlers may practice thro(s karate
fighters may practice punches and kicks and gymnasts may practice
acrobatics. 6a&ing enough time to practice these actions in the phase
is another matter.
4+P9O?E+ E22EC#S
People often approach the practice of &arious phase states (ith
deep"rooted misconceptions about (hat can actually be achie&ed
through practice. E&erything listed in this section refers to these
misconceptions. )t has not been pro&en that any of these things is
impossibleJ ho(e&er actions should be based on pro&en and &erified
methods in order to a&oid making mistakes and (asting time.
Ehysical e#it' )f the first e#perience (ith the phase phenomenon
happens by accident it is almost impossible not to interpret it as a
real separation of the soul from the body I a physical e#it. This is
ho( the initial phase e#perience really feels. .ith e#perience it
becomes easily noticeable that certain things in reality do not match
things in the phase like the placement of ob%ects or furniture in the
house (here a phase is first encountered.
'o actual physical e#it from the body has e&er been pro&en
through scientific e#perimentation and obser&ation. For e#ample in
the phase it is not possible to fly around to locations in physical
(orld although it may seem so the locations that are e#perienced are
produced (ithin the mind. 'or is it possible to pinch someone in the
phase and then to find a bruise on the person (hile in reality.
Other &orlds' The phase space is similar to the physical (orld
and a practitioner may be inclined to think that the soul has left the
body. 4ometimes the phase takes on an absolutely unnatural form. 1s
a result the practitioner may decide that a parallel (orld has been
entered- the (orld beyond the astral plane mental space or the
ether. 1lthough tra&el in the phase can lead to many places this does
not mean that the phase allo(s tra&el through or use of actual
alternate (orlds. The practitioner should be reasonable.
3evelop$ent of super-a"ilities' )t is partially correct to consider
the practice of the phase as an e#trasensory ability since it is an actual
de&elopment of e#tremely unusual skills that ha&e al(ays been
considered mystical. Times ha&e changed and the phase should
hardly be shuttled off to the esoteric obscure corners of kno(ledge.
There e#ists an unpro&en theory that the practice of the phase can
impart unusual abilities. .hile literature is full of references to this
effect these abilities ha&e not yet been pro&en by anyone. The same
applies to intentionally de&eloping unusual abilities in the phase. Pes
these may be trained (hile in the phase but this does not mean that
training in the phase (ill yield the same results in the real (orld.
Practice should not be for the sake of achie&ing super"abilities since
there are many pro&en applications that do translate to reality in
&aluable (ays. 5e realistic.
4SE O2 #7E P7ASE B8 #7E &ISAB;E&
.hile practicing the phase may still be &ie(ed by the ma%ority as
entertainment or an element of self"de&elopment at best phase
practice takes on a (hole ne( meaning for the physically disabled.
For them the phase may be the only place (here the handicaps of
reality dissol&e and disabled practitioners e#perience a range of
possibility greater than the life e#perienced in reality.
1 blind person (ill see again in the phase e&en more clearly than
seeing people do in reality. 4omeone (ho is paraly=ed (ill be able
(alk run and also fly. 1 deaf person (ill hear the murmur of
streams and the chirping of birds. For the disabled the phase practice
is a chance to disco&er ne( incomparable (orlds free of physical
limitation.
'aturally there are some nuances that must be understood. First
for e#ample if a person (as born blind then there is the 2uestion as
to (hether or not they (ould be able to see in the phase the same (ay
ordinary people see. 6o(e&er this issue has not been fully studied
and blind people should simply carry out their o(n independent
research. 4econd some types of disabilities can negati&ely affect the
practice of the phase states. For e#ample people (ho ha&e gone
blind ha&e greater difficultly catching the intermediate state bet(een
sleep and (akefulness since unlike seeing people they may a(aken
(ithout opening their eyes to the perception of sound. Third a purely
psychological disability plays an enormous negati&e role.
Psychologically disabled people ha&e a (hole range of specific
beliefs and attitudes that may present an obstacle for them.
.hate&er the indi&idual issues this particular area of phase
applications re2uires additional study. )t deser&es significant
attention because it is a &alid tool for the rehabilitation of the
disabled. )t is (orkable uni2ue and e#tremely surprising in terms of
the e#periences that it offers.
#8PICA; ,IS#A=ES
)7E+ 4SI+G APP;ICA#IO+S
1ttempting an applied use of the phase (ithout reaching a good
depth. 7eepening must al(ays be performed before applications are
attempted.
5eing so in&ol&ed in phase applications that !maintaining$
techni2ues are forgotten.
Forgetting to consider ho( to breathe (hen tra&eling through
Outer 4pace or under(ater (hich may lead to asphy#iation.
,oncentrating on a certain ob%ect (hile tra&eling through time
instead of concentrating on time tra&el (hich should be the focus
since it is the point of performing the applications.
Forgetting techni2ues for !maintaining$ (hen animate ob%ects are
encountered (hen these techni2ues must al(ays be kept in mind.
1n inability to o&ercome fear during contact (ith deceased
people. This fear must be o&ercome once and it (ill ne&er resurface
again.
0imiting desires (hile practicing the phase. There is no limit to
desire (ithin the phase.
0imiting the performance of certain actions although there are no
customary norms of beha&ior in the phase unless the practitioner
decides upon specific limits.
.hile looking for information in the phase attempting to obtain
kno(ledge (hich clearly e#ceeds the scope of the subconscious
mind.
1pplying the techni2ue of obtaining information from animate
ob%ects (ithout kno(ing ho( to communicate (ith them.
Forgetting to check the ability of an ob%ect to con&ey &alid
kno(ledge. The probability of bad information is much higher if it is
not &erified.
Failing to &erify information in the phase before using it in
reality.
Forgetting to &erify serious information obtained in the phase in
reality before using it. 9erification absolutely must be performed to
a&oid using bad information in reality.
1 single attempt to influence the physiology through the phase. )n
the ma%ority of cases results are gained through repeated effort.
1n attempt to cure some disease only using the phase (hereas it
is compulsory to seek medical ad&ice.
)nitially belie&ing that the phase is the e#it of the soul from the
body (hile this is easily refuted in practice.
,oncentrating only on unpro&en applications despite all the
e&idence out there that this is most likely a (aste of time.
<uestions
1. .hat are the three basic applications of the phase/
+. 1re pro&en practical phase applications accessible to any
practitioner/
8. .hile in the phase is it possible to actually tra&el through
1frica/
:. )s it possible to (alk on the moon in the phase/
;. )s it possible (hile in the phase to appear at the time of the
EarthDs creation/
<. )n the phase is it possible to appear in the magical (orld
behind the looking glass/
>. .hich relati&es can be met in the phase/
?. )s it possible to meet and talk to your fa&orite actor in the
phase/
@. .here can one reali=e any cherished dream/
1A. ,an a practitioner appear in the computer game 3oo$/
11. ,an a musician use the phase for creati&e purposes/
1+. 7oes the practicing the phase influence a personDs
imagination/
18. .hat most probably go&erns the phase space/
1:. .hat kind of information is obtainable in the phase/
1;. .hile in the phase is it possible to find out (here the lost key
to an apartment is located/
1<. .hat kind of people can disco&er (here treasure is hidden in
the phase/
1>. 4hould any information obtained in the phase be construed as
accurate/
1?. 4hould information obtained in the phase be &erified after
(aking up e&en if itDs already &erified in the phase/
1@. 4hould obtaining information occur before deepening has
been performed/
+A. To obtain information (hile using the animate ob%ects
techni2ue (ho should be talked to if the goal is it to find out the
thoughts of a boss at (ork/
+1. 6o( might information from an animate ob%ect be obtained/
++. ,an an inscription on a (all be used as an inanimate source of
information/
+8. )s it possible to use the episode techni2ue to learn (here one
has lost the key to oneDs apartment/
+:. 4hould a doctor be consulted before trying to cure a disease
through phase practice/
+;. 1re results from influencing physiology in the phase al(ays
1AAK guaranteed/
+<. .hat phase techni2ues might be used to influence the bodies
of other people/
+>. )s it possible to obtain information that can be used to
influence the body and its functions/
+?. )s it possible to take a (ell"kno(n painkiller in the phase and
feel its effects on e#it/
+@. )s it possible to use autosuggestion in the phase/
8A. ,an athletes use the phase to de&elop their skills/
81. )s it realistic to e#pect to the soul (ill e#it the body (hile
practicing the phase/
8+. )s it possible to enter a parallel uni&erse through the phase/
88. 4hould a practitioner hope to de&elop super"abilities in the
phase/
#asks
1. 9isit the Pyramids of 3i=a in the phase. Meet your fa&orite
singer and tra&el to your dream house.
+. .hile in the phase find a (ise person (ho is an authority on
matters of the phase and learn from them (hat entrance
techni2ues (ill best suit your practice.
8. Try to percei&e heat throughout the entire body by
translocation to a sauna or through auto"suggestion.
:. 0earn to mo&e ob%ects by simply staring at them in the phase
and appreciate the e#tent to (hich this skill is reflected in reality.
Part III
Au-iliary Infor(ation
Chapter ! 4seful #ips
A P9AG,A#IC APP9OAC7
The only sure (ay to get practice (ithout unnecessarily (asting
time is to ha&e a pragmatic and rational approach to the nature and
possibilities of the phase phenomenon.
The ma%ority of a&ailable information regarding dissociati&e
phenomena is inaccurate. This becomes ob&ious during initial entries
into the phase. This is (hy practice should begin from the
perspecti&e of a clean slate using a logical bearing in thinking-
everything not confir$ed "y personal e#perience should "e ta+en
&ith a grain of salt( This means only personal e#perience should be
taken seriously not the e#perience of ac2uaintances authors
teachers blogs or forums.
To err is humanJ thus it is also human to pass on errors. 1s a
result many parado#ical old (i&esD tales concerning the phase
phenomenon ha&e become accepted a priori.
'ot e&erything (ritten in esoteric literature should be thro(n out.
4ome things may possibly be dra(n from it. 1fter reading such
literature a practitioner should not assume that the ne( kno(ledge is
a uni&ersal truth.
For a house to stand firm it needs a solid foundation. The only
(ay to build a good foundation phase practice is to approach the
phenomenon in a do(n"to"earth manner from a scientific
perspecti&e discounting any purported supernatural phenomena.
Once a solid foundation has been established e&eryone has the right
to build their o(n truth on it.
I+&EPE+&E+# A+A;8SIS
)f a practitioner is only interested in ha&ing phase e#periences
then the simple treatment of this guidebook and other materials may
suffice. 6o(e&er if a practitioner (ants to achie&e the best results
ample focus must be gi&en to indi&idual thought and formation of
opinion based on personal analysis.
Until all 2uestions are ans(ered through a search for ans(ers in
&arious sources of information no real progress should be e#pected.
Many things cannot be described or e#plained. The resolution of
many issues (ill al(ays remain up to indi&idual %udgment and
understanding. Finding all of the ans(ers is impossible. Moreo&er
trying to possess all of the ans(ers is a serious inhibitor to real
progress because the practitioner (ould ha&e to digress into dubious
literature and con&ersation aside from real formati&e practice.
The ad&ice and e#periences of others may lead to error. )n no case
should there be any authorities or unachie&able ideals. 1 logical
e&en skeptical approach should be taken during research and practice.
The goal of this guidebook is to pro&ide the reader (ith linear
factual information sufficient for the de&elopment of independent
analysis.
Each time a practitioner encounters some incomprehensible
phenomenon or problem (hen performing phase techni2ues an
independent analysis of the phenomenon should be formed before
looking else(here for the cause. )f a seeker looks for ans(ers outside
of personal reasoning there is a high risk of assimilating and acting
upon a fallacy.
Many practitioners are not (illing to analy=e personal successes
and failures and instead search all sorts of books (hich often
contradict one another and using a hodge"podge of e#traneous
un&erified information can only lead one to further and 2uite
infectious fallacy.
APP9OAC7 #O ;I#E9A#49E
0iterature of e&ery sort has al(ays been the main &ehicle for
disseminating information about the phase state. The phase
phenomenon is referred to by other terms- astral pro%ection out"of"
body tra&el or lucid dreaming. )n addition to disseminating
information many books are often &ehicles for disseminating
fallacies.
This is easy to recogni=e (hen researching se&eral such books
and comparing described e&ents and theories. The information is
more often than not contradictory and based on opinions that ha&e
ne&er been &erified by anyone including the authors. The result is a
mass of speculation that has no bearing on reality nearly al(ays
accompanied by a false certainty about the sub%ect matter. 6o(e&er
unlike the real (orld the phase is not a place (here one can belie&e
oneDs eyes or feelings. The phasesD appearance and 2ualities depend
&ery much on the person e#periencing it.
For e#ample if a practitioner belie&es upon entering the phase the
body (ill be lying nearby on the bed then it (ill al(ays be there. )f a
practitioner belie&es that the percei&ed body should al(ays be
tethered to the physical body then in the practitioner (ill al(ays see
and e&en feel a tether in the phase. This is a simple case of
e#pectations becoming reality. 4imilarly someone (ho has entered
the phase by accident and thinks that the time of death has arri&ed
may see angels and a tunnel (ith a light at the end. )f someone is
e#tremely religious there may be a perception that something holy
e&en 3od has appeared. )f entry to the phase is construed as a result
of being abducted by aliens then that is e#actly (hat (ill happen.
This (ould all be 2uite funny if it (ere not actually encountered.
.hen it occurs the only thing left to do is to belie&e. To belie&e to
tell others about it and (rite books about it...
There are authors (ho impart no illusions but it is often difficult
for a no&ice to separate the truth from illusion or open fabrication
(hich is (hy a skeptical approach to the contents of any book is
(arranted. The only truth con&eyed in any book is that (hich has
been &erified by personal e#perience. The rest should simply be
noted and possibly taken into consideration.
)n conclusion books should be studied to disco&er techni2ue"
related information that allo(s a practitioner to enter the phase and
control the e#perience. This is the only point of intersection among
all beliefs and theories.
P9AC#ICE E+?I9O+,E+#
4ince techni2ues used to enter the phase are associated (ith a
specific type of mental operation it is necessary to create
comfortable conditions so that e#ternal distracters are kept to a
minimum. 1 room should neither be too cold or too hot nor too
bright. Performing techni2ues at a comfortable temperature in a
darkened room or (hile (earing a sleeping mask are (ays to
promote unhindered practice.
)nterfering noises are often also ma%or distracters and isolation
from such noises is necessary to successful practice. )t is often
sufficient to turn off the phone and close doors and (indo(s. )f this
does not help or if it is e#tremely loud outside the (indo( one can
use standard earmuffs.
)t is also helpful to gi&e ad&ance notice to people so that they are
not alarmed. )t is also preferable that no one is in the bed (ith the
practitioner. Most often domestic animals interfere (ith the
performance of techni2ues (hich is (hy they should be fed
beforehand and kept out of the room (here direct or indirect
techni2ues are practiced.
#A;=I+G )I#7 ;I=E-,I+&E& PEOP;E
3reat benefit is deri&ed by discussing personal e#periences (ith
other practitioners. This leads to an e#change of information ne(
kno(ledge and mutual help concerning certain problems and issues.
The greatest effect comes through communication in person and
not solely through mail forums and blogs. Meeting face"to"face (ith
like"minded people promotes camaraderie and a useful
kno(ledgebase to consider during indi&idual practice.
7ue to the fact that kno(ledge of the phenomenon is
underde&eloped difficulties may arise in finding someone to talk to.
This can be sol&ed by personally sharing phase e#periences (ith
friends and family members regardless of (hether they are fello(
practitioners. )t is e&en better to pass on training literature like this
guidebook.
The (ebsite www.obe4u.com also has a discussion forum de&oted
to the phase making it possible to obtain and e#change a large
amount of information. The site also has the contact information for
the coordinators of Phase Practitioner ,lubs all around the (orld
(hich is a non"commercial association of enthusiasts (ho meet to
e#change and discuss e#periences.

#7E 9IG7# )A8 #O =EEP A GO49+A;
Beeping a %ournal can be of much help (hile learning and
practicing the phase. .hen properly kept a %ournal can help a
practitioner to de&elop an analysis that (ill increase the 2uality of
phase e#periences. 5y and large keeping a %ournal helps to iron out a
sporadic practice turning it into a structured discipline that can be
mastered.
1n effecti&e diary should contain a massi&e amount of indicators
that allo( a statistical study to unco&er patterns. )t is essential that
each entry include the date time of day or night a detailed account of
entries into the phase and phase e#periences. 7escriptions of
mistakes and a plan of action for the ne#t phase should also be
recorded. 7uring the no&ice stages of practice e&en noting
unsuccessful entry attempts is beneficial. 0ater on only successful
phase e#periences may be recorded.

6ere is an e#ample of a proper %ournal entry-
&ataC
2#perience /o( 12
January 6
th
, 2H
2'88 EM
E-perienceC
- &o+e up early in the $orning( %fter e#ercising, - too+ a
sho&er and ate "rea+fast( - &atched TF and read "oo+s until
lunch(
- laid do&n for a nap at 1 EM, right after lunch( - felt li+e
perfor$ing indirect techni4ues, and affir$ed this intention( -
&o+e up the first ti$e to $ove$ent, "ut after trying to e$ploy
forced falling asleep Bin order to negate the effects of the
$ove$ent), - fell asleep( - &o+e up the second ti$e &ithout
$ove$ent and tried to roll out( This didn.t &or+ and - tried
levitating and getting up( %fter that, - $oved on to phanto$
&iggling( Move$ent occurred in $y right hand( %fter doing
this for several seconds, - decided to try listening in( Sounds
started, "ut - &as una"le to $a+e the$ louder( 0o&ever,
i$ages appeared "efore $y eyes and - started to vie& the$(
%fter they "eca$e realistic, - decided to try rolling out and it
&or+ed &ithout a hitch(
My vision &as di$, as if through a veil( But then, the rest
of the sensations - felt reached the verge of reality( This is
&hen - &ent to the &indo&( For so$e reason, it &as su$$er
outside, and not &inter( There &as a red fire-truc+ outside the
&indo&( There &ere really lo& clouds in the s+y( The sun &as
a"ove the$(
/e#t, everything 4uic+ly faded a&ay and - found $yself
"ac+ in $y "ody( Then, - got up and loo+ed at the ti$e( -t &as
2'16 EM(
,istakesC
1( 5hen the phanto$ &iggling &or+ed, - should have
aggressively tried to increase the range of $ove$ent, and not
si$ply done &iggling, let alone change to another techni4ue(
%fter all, if &iggling occurs, the phase can al&ays "e entered(
2( The sa$e &ith the sounds( - had no great desire to a$plify
sounds or even listen in( 2verything &as done lac+adaisically(
8( - should have started &ith deepening and not actions, as
visual sensations &ere not vivid( I( - should have e$ployed
techni4ues for $aintaining( 6( Jou can.t loo+ do&n for long
&ithout si$ultaneously using techni4ues for $aintaining, yet -
too+ in everything outside the &indo& and in the s+y( K( -
forgot a"out the plan of action( L( - should have tried again to
enter the phase(
Plan of action for ne-t ti(eC
1( 3efinitely deepen the phase as $uch as possi"le( 2( -
should try to go through a &all( 8( Translocate to $y %untie
in /e& Jor+( I( Translocate to the Statue of Mi"erty and
e#a$ine her cro&n( 6( Try to conduct the e#peri$ent of
putting $y hand into $y head(
Chapter " ! Practitioners5 E-periences
#7E SIG+I2ICA+CE
O2 O#7E9 PEOP;E5S EEPE9IE+CES
The ability to analy=e the e#periences of others can be a great
supplement to personal training. This allo(s a practitioner to re&ie(
and think through situations that ha&e not yet been personally
encountered. The more a practitioner analyses the e#periences of
other practitioners fe(er mistakes (ill be made during indi&idual
practice.
Reading the e#periences contained in this section (ill shed much
light on proper phase practice. The actions that these practitioners
took to achie&e results (ill be subconsciously retained by the
readerDs memory. 0ater these actions may reproduce similar
circumstances in the phase affording &aluable opportunities to
respond using proper actions.
1t the beginning stages of practice many practitioners lack in real
descriptions of phase e#periences (hile techni2ue"related kno(ledge
abounds. Techni2ues can be conceptuali=ed in many different (ays
(hile descriptions of their application are much more demonstrati&e.
Thus many practitioners ha&e no idea about ho( genuine practice
transpires.
The e#periences described in this section are useful " e&en from a
psychological point of &ie(. E&en if a person belie&es that the phase
phenomenon e#ists it may be construed as e#tremely difficult or
personally impossible. 1fter learning about other peopleDs
e#periences a person (ill reali=e that these practitioners ha&e been
able to enter the phase (ithout any complicated or incomprehensible
techni2ues. The reader (ill understand that the key is to take right
actions at the right moment trying to master the phase (ith calmness
and confidence.
.hile re&ie(ing and analy=ing other peopleDs e#periences in this
section the reader should remember that these e#periences are based
on personal beliefs about the phenomenon (hich is (hy occult
terminology and notions may be encountered. 6o(e&er such aspects
of the descriptions are not important. Focus should be gi&en to
techni2ue"related actions described in the accounts. The reader
should also take into account that some nuances Flike e#periential
realismG are not al(ays clear in the te#t and that it is not al(ays
possible to determine (hy certain e&ents occurred in the phase
e#periences described here.
1ll of the follo(ing descriptions belong to real people (ho either
related the accounts orally (rote them do(n during classes at the
4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el submitted them &ia email or posted
them on the forum at www.obe4u.com. Though the total number of
recorded &erifiable phase descriptions e#ceeds one thousand only
se&eral cases that are illustrati&e and useful for de&eloping analysis
ha&e been selected. Primarily these are descriptions of the
practitionersD initial phase e#periences (hich are most rele&ant to
ne( practitioners.
The large number of mistakes made by almost e&ery practitioner
regardless of their le&el of e#perience should not be taken too
seriously (hile reading the comments. 1ctually it is a rare occasion
that the phase is e#perienced (ithout any techni2ue"related errors.
E&erybody makes mistakes.
E#periments are listed in ascending order of 2uality and number
of properly performed actions. 1ccounts ha&e been published (ith
the permission of the authors.
A+A;8SIS O2 SE;EC#E&
P9AC#I#IO+E9SI EEPE9IE+CES
+oD
Boris Pronyakin
Copy6riterD =ie>J 4kraine
- &o+e up in the >correct? state( - i$$ediately felt vi"rations,
and "efore - had ti$e to ti$e to thin+ a"out anything, - &as +noc+ed
out of $y "ody "y a strong +ic+( - started falling( - had no vision, the
floor &as gone( Mi+e a nose-diving airplane, - &as in a free-fall( -
+ept dropping faster and faster( - started to feel that - &as losing
control( The only thing - could do &as increase the speed &ith &hich
- fell, all of the &ays that occurred to $e to try $aintain the phase
that - atte$pted at that $o$ent only lo&ered $y degree of
a&areness( Touching did not do anything for $e, as - &as 1ust an
une$"odied spirit in a co$plete vacuu$( Fision &as also $issing( -
started to panic due to the i$$inent foul( But the acceleration of the
fall did not help either, and - &as flying and &aiting for the $o$ent
&hen - &ould "e thro&n out into the drea$ &orld( %nd - dropped li+e
this until - fell asleep(
<uestionsC 7id 5oris describe a direct or indirect techni2ue/
.hat could he ha&e done if no spontaneous separation had occurred/
6o( could 5oris ha&e more correctly used deepening techni2ues/
.hy (asnEt 5oris thro(n into a phase episode/ .hy did he fall
asleep/
Ans6ers and Co((entsC 1n indirect techni2ue (as employed.
)f spontaneous separation had not occurred 5oris could ha&e tried to
separate on his o(n. )f an attempt to separate had failed it (ould be
necessary to implement indirect techni2ues by intensifying the
&ibrations and then try once again to separate. )n order to deepen
and mean(hile reach a destination (hile falling 5oris should ha&e
applied translocation techni2ues and upon reaching a location
continued to deepen by means of sensory amplification. For e#ample
he could ha&e applied the techni2ue of translocation by teleportation
(ith his eyes closed or simply tried to catch sight of his hands
through the darkness (hich also (ould ha&e induced an e#it.
5oris also did not pay any attention to the roar in his ears. )t could
ha&e been used for the techni2ue of listening in (hich (ould ha&e
helped him to deepen and maintain. The lack of a set aim to land
some(here resulted in his endless fall though it does not al(ays
happen this (ay. 5oris fell asleep due to his passi&ity and also
because he forgot that falling asleep (as a possibility though he did
remember about the possibility of an inad&ertent return to reality Fa
foulG.
+oD "
Ale-ei Bakhare>
EngineerD SochiJ 9ussia
This &as the first ti$e that - $anaged to "eco$e conscious &hile
drea$ing( Before falling asleep, - concentrated on the dar+ness
"efore $y eyes and tried to re$ain consciousness as long as - could(
%ll of a sudden, - drea$t that - &as levitating to the ceiling, &hich
resulted in $y "eco$ing conscious that - &as drea$ing( My phanto$
"ody responded poorly to atte$pts to control it, and si$ply hovered
"eneath the ceiling( There &ere t&o people sitting on the floor "elo&(
They &ere loo+ing in $y direction, "ut it see$ed that they did not see
$e( %t this point - &o+e up and felt so$e sort of tingling and itching
in $y legs(
<uestionsC .hat factors led to the entry into the phase through
dream consciousness/ .hat needed to be done (hile ho&ering about
beneath the ceiling/ .hy did the foul happen so fast/ .hat should
ha&e been done immediately after returning to the body/
Ans6ers and Co((entsC 7ream consciousness occurred due to
the 1le#eiDs intent to concentrate on the space before his eyes and his
desire to remain conscious for as long as possible. The process of
becoming conscious (as caused by the sensation of flying (hile
dreaming. Flying almost al(ays becomes an anchor for dream
consciousness. )mmediately after the phase occurred 1le#ei should
ha&e started deepening. )nstead he simply ho&ered about and
obser&ed. .hile all the mo&ements may ha&e been difficult to
perform they should ha&e ne&ertheless still been done &ery acti&ely.
1s a result lightness and a deepening of the phase (ould ha&e
ensued. 6is inad&ertent e#it from the phase happened due to
passi&ity failure to deepen and non"compliance (ith the rules for
maintaining the phase. E&en upon returning to his body 1le#ei
should ha&e tried to separate again.
+oD %
&(itry ,arko>
9adio ,echanicD ,osco6J 9ussia
My first ti$e &as the $ost terri"le event in $y life( - had never
e#perienced such terror( -t happened in 3ece$"er, 1!!( - &as
falling asleep in $y "ed at ho$e( Suddenly, - heard so$eone enter
$y roo$, "ut - did not pay attention to the >intruder?( Then, t&o
fe$ale hands gra""ed $e fro$ "ehind, and &hile pressing $y "elly,
started to lift $y "ody up( - distinctly felt thin fingers &ith long nails
on $y "elly, "ut &as co$pletely paraly*ed and a"solutely una"le
$ove any part of $y "ody or put up any +ind of resistance( - felt $y
"ody go through the ceiling, "ut then &as pulled still higher and
higher(
- got scared that this could "e death( - &as afraid not so $uch of
death as of the un+no&n( %ll of this happened so s&iftly that - found
$yself unprepared for such a crossover( - started to pray( - as+ed
;od to help $e free $yself and go "ac+( - panic+ed( - can.t say ho&
$any seconds $y forced levitation lasted or ho& high - &as lifted
a"ove $y house, "ut the $o$ent ca$e &hen - instantly returned to
$y "ed(
<uestionsC .as this entry into the phase deliberate/ .hat kind of
techni2ue led to the phase/ .hat is the name for the complete
immobili=ation that 7mitry encountered/ .hat should he ha&e done
in order to start mo&ing/ .hy did his body easily go through the
ceiling/ .hy (as he able to stop this terrible e#perience by praying/
.hat could he ha&e done immediately upon returning to his body/
Ans6ers and Co((entsC This phase e#perience (as
spontaneous and falls under the category of direct techni2ues since
there (as no significant lapse into sleep. The (hole e#perience (as
accompanied by sleep paralysis (hich is (hy it (as difficult for
7mitry to do anything. )n order to mo&e in this type of situation it
(ould ha&e been necessary to intensify the phase state by using an
indirect techni2ue or redouble efforts to mo&e.p
7mitryDs body (ent through the ceiling (ithout any difficulty
because there (as no &ision and the phase itself had not been
deepened other(ise this (ould not ha&e happened so easily. Praying
and appealing to 3od helped in this case because praying facilitated a
rela#ation of perceptions and an intention to go back to reality- t(o
factors (hich are crucial during emergency return techni2ues. Upon
returning to his body he could ha&e still tried to separate again
though this (ould ha&e been easier said than done due to the fear
associated (ith the first e#perience.
+oD '
I>an 8ako>le>
StudentD Ant6erpJ Belgiu(
- don.t +no& &hat &o+e $e up, "ut - +ne& right a&ay that
so$ething &as out of order( - could not open $y eyes, and $y "ody
&as al$ost 1ust as+ing to rise up( - understood &hat &as going on N
all of this indicated that - &as having an out-of-"ody e#perience( The
first thing - tried &as to lift $y left hand up, and it &or+ed( -
understood that this &as an astral hand, "ecause - could see through
it( - $oved hastily and carefully to the other side of the "ed BThere
&as a strange sensation in $y head at that ti$e)( - cal$ed do&n and
tried to do so$ething again( - levitated a"out half a $eter a"ove the
"ed( Fision ca$e "ac+ to $e right then and - sa& &hat appeared to
"e $y roo$, "ut not e#actly it, as the rug on the floor &as of a
different color pattern and the door &as closed for so$e reason( -
could not co$prehend &hy everything &as lit fro$ "ehind $y "ac+(
Then, - loo+ed over $y left shoulder and sa& a s$all "right &hite
"all "ehind $y shoulder "lade at a distance of H inches( -t &as
lighting up the roo$ up( Then - tried to go through the door, "ut &as
una"le to( Out of the fear that - &ould never return to $y real "ody, -
&o+e up in the everyday &orld(
<uestionsC 7uring the beginning of his e#perience (hat
phenomenon typical to the phase and a(akening did )&an encounter/
.hat kind of techni2ue direct or indirect led to the phase/ .hat
specific techni2ues (ere employed/ 6o( could the sensation of !the
body %ust asking to rise up$ ha&e been used/ .hat should ha&e been
done immediately (hen he reali=ed that it (as possible to raise his
hand/ .hat should ha&e been the first actions taken after le&itation/
.hy (as it unnecessary to immediately try to go through the door/
.hat should ha&e been done (hen )&an returned to his body/ 7oes
this practitioner ha&e a do(n"to"earth &ie( or an esoteric &ie( of the
nature of this phenomenon/
Ans6ers and Co((entsC Upon a(akening in a state of sleep
paralysis )&an understood that he could use this opportunity for the
phase and immediately started attempts to separate (ithout
employing techni2ues for creating the state as they (ould ha&e been
superfluous. This (as an indirect techni2ue by nature. 6e could ha&e
follo(ed his impulse to le&itate from the &ery beginning instead of
mo&ing his hands. 1fter his hand started to mo&e he could ha&e
stood up or separated. )nstead )&an simply rolled o&er and calmed
do(n for an instant although doing so is strongly discouraged and is
a (aste of the progress made up to this point. Then after starting to
le&itate he should ha&e first of all assumed a position distinct from
that of his real body stood up on the floor and immediately started
deepening. )nstead he di&erted his attention to the light source and an
attempt to go through the door.
E&en if e&erything had been done correctly from the beginning
there (ould ha&e been no reason to attempt to go through the door.
)&an could ha&e simply opened it. The skill of going through ob%ects
should be learned after first fine"tuning the ability to deepen and
maintain the phase. There (as no reason to return out of fear but
e&en a return to the body another immediate attempt at separating
(ould most likely ha&e been successful.
The use of the term of !astral hand$ indicates that the practitioner
harbors esoteric &ie(s on the sub%ect.
+oD *
+atalya =oHheno>a
EngineerD Shchelko>oJ 9ussia
5hen - &as a"out 1L or 1H years old, - read so$e esoteric
articles on astral pro1ection( They see$ed 4uite interesting to $e, "ut
no $ore than a curiosity N - did not particularly "elieve in such
things(
One evening, - &ent to "ed as usual( - &o+e up in the $iddle of
the night, "ut &as una"le to $ove $y "ody and there &as a loud
noise in $y head( 0aving "een re$inded of those articles, - si$ply
tried to levitate and - $anaged to do so, as if through $y forehead
so$eho&( The sensation of flying &as very realistic, to $y great
surprise( The first thought that occurred to $e &as, O5o&, these
astral guys &eren.t lying,? - hovered a"ove $y "ody for so$e ti$e in
the dar+( - thought of vision, and it started to appear( - then fle&
to&ards the &indo&, and upon turning around in to face $y "ody, -
sa& it in its proper place( - decided to fly "ac+ to it and touch it(
5hen - finally po+ed it, it suc+ed $y "ac+ into it, causing a 4uite
strange sensation(
<uestionsC .hat type of techni2ue did 'atalya use/ .hat (ould
she ha&e needed to do if her attempt at le&itating had been
unsuccessful/ .hy (as the phase short"li&ed/ .hat should she ha&e
done upon returning to her body/ .hy did she use the term !astral$/
.ere the articles about astral pro%ection of any significant help/
Ans6ers and Co((entsC Upon a(akening in a state of a sleep
paralysis 'atalya stumbled upon the idea of employing indirect
techni2ues. 4he managed to separate immediately but if sheDd
encountered problems in doing so she could ha&e started the
techni2ue of listening in to the !noise$ in her head. The phase (as
short"li&ed due to a lack of acti&ity and failure to perform deepening
and !maintaining$ techni2ues. 1fter returning to her body she should
ha&e tried to immediately separate.
'atalya holds esoteric &ie(s on the nature of the phase
phenomenon (hich is (hy she uses such terminology for it.
6o(e&er the articles helped her to perform the right actions at the
right moment.
+o .
Ale-ander 2ur(enko>
StudentD Saint PetersburgJ 9ussia
- &o+e up at early in the night after so$e difficulties &ith falling
asleep( Blurred i$ages started to float "efore $y eyes and - reali*ed
that - could enter the phase( - started to discard unnecessary i$ages,
and after getting ahold of one of the$, - e$erged in so$e +ind of a
yello& corridor( The level of general realness and a&areness of the
e#perience &as a"out H7 to !7 of that of reality( - re$e$"ered
a"out the $ethods for deepening, &hich is &hy - started to loo+ at
everything going on around $e, "ut this did not yield any serious
results( - started to touch $yself, "ut all sensation see$ed so$e&hat
da$pened( - reali*ed that - &as losing a&areness( - ca$e round, "ut
nevertheless fell asleep in a"out 2 seconds(
<uestionsC )s it possible to call the techni2ue used in this
description a direct techni2ue/ .hat specific techni2ue for creating
the phase (as employed/ .hich separation techni2ue did 1le#ander
use/ .hat could ha&e been the reason for the !dampened sensation$
and inability to deepen/ .hat caused him to fall asleep/
Ans6ers and Co((entsC The techni2ue employed cannot be
considered a direct one though it (as used at the beginning of the
night. 1s a matter of fact it appears that the preliminary lapse of
consciousness into sleep (as significant. )f such preliminary sleep
had lasted only se&eral minutes the techni2ue could ha&e been
considered partially direct. The techni2ue for obser&ing images (as
employed correctly because the images appeared on their o(n.
1le#ander did not employ any techni2ues for separation as the
obser&ing images techni2ue often brings the obser&er into the
obser&ed image or some other (orld (hich is e#actly (hat happened
here. Most likely the (eakness of the phase (as due to meager
le&els of acti&ity and moti&ation (hich (ere caused by the fact that
it (as early in the night. The practitioner fell asleep because he failed
to deepen sufficiently and not keep from falling asleep. 3eneral
acti&ity (as also &ery lo(. The bodyDs desire to fall asleep played a
ma%or role in the process. 1le#ander had after all been ha&ing
problems sleeping.
+oD /
9o(an 9euto>
Syste( Ad(inistratorD Sa(araJ 9ussia
Truly, the $ost interesting things al$ost al&ays happen
une#pectedly(
%fter a sufficiently long "rea+ in $y atte$pts to go to the other
&orld, tonight - decided to try it again( - thre& in the to&el after yet
another unsuccessful atte$pt, rolled to $y other side, and decided to
si$ply get a good night.s sleep( - do not +no& e#actly ho& $uch ti$e
passed &hile - lay do&n and thought a"out &hat - &as still doing
&rong &hile o"serving interesting i$ages that $y i$agination &as
dra&ing( But at one fine $o$ent, - suddenly felt the pheno$enon
that is co$$only referred to as vi"rations( - started to intensify the$
B- should add that the feeling is indescri"a"le), "ut - could not
levitate, though - really &anted to ta+e a loo+ at $yself fro$ the
outside( - decided to si$ply stand up, and that.s &hen it all "eca$e
$ost interesting, The entire process of transitioning fro$ a
hori*ontal position to a vertical one &as acco$panied "y
increasingly palpa"le vi"rations and a louder and louder roaring
sound in $y head( The sensation &as the sa$e as that e#perienced
after going to "ed after not having slept for 2I hours and then "eing
suddenly roused "y so$e"ody' $y head spun, everything started
crac+ling inside of it, and - &as a"out to lose consciousness( Then, a
flic+ering picture started to appear( -t sta"ili*ed after one or t&o
seconds, the roaring in $y head died do&n, and - reali*ed that - &as
sitting on $y "ed(
- &as in $y apart$ent, thought it &as noticea"ly altered( My
roo$ see$ed $ore or less the sa$e, though the interior &as indeed
different upon detailed e#a$ination( For e#a$ple, $y $o"ile phone,
&hich is al&ays &ithin a reach, &as so$eho& an older and different
$odel( -t turned out to "e the first o"1ect that - tested, as - suddenly
&anted very $uch to find out &hat ti$e it &as and chec+ &hich day
of the $onth it &as( - distinctly felt the phone in $y hand, "ut upon
atte$pting to concentrate on and loo+ at the display, - &as thro&n
"ac+ into the reality( - i$$ediately cli$"ed "ac+ out of $y "ody and
decided to si$ply pace around the apart$ent &hile trying to
re$e$"er &hat - could e#peri$ent on( - tried to con1ure an o"1ect,
"ut that didn.t &or+ and resulted in so$e $ental activity( This
caused the phase to fade and $y "eing thro&n "ac+ into reality( -n
total, there &ere a"out five successive entries into the phase that
lasted for 2 to 8 $inutes each( The e#periences &ere not sta"le at all,
&hich is &hy - &as e#a$ining $y surroundings in a hurry, al&ays
trying to get ahold of anything - could get $y hand on( 0o&ever,
there &ere a good a$ount of i$pressions, considering that it &as $y
first entry(
<uestionsC .hat type of techni2ue did Roman use to enter the
phase/ .hat (ere the key precursors of the phase/ .hich separation
techni2ue (as used/ )f Roman had failed to completely separate
(hat techni2ue besides &ibrations should he ha&e considered/ .hat
is the most likely reason for all of the fouls/ .hich single action
allo(ed the practitioner to make the phase fi&e times longer/
Ans6ers and Co((entsC The phase (as entered through a
direct techni2ue (ith the comfortable position that Roman (as lying
in being the main catalyst. 1s long as Roman (as lying in an
uncomfortable position his mind (as unable to completely turn off
physical perception and this (as most likely the reason (hy there
(ere no short lapses in dreaming. )f Roman (ere still unable to
separate (hen using the techni2ue of standing up or any other
techni2ue besides intensifying the &ibrations he could ha&e tried
listening in as there (as some noise.
)nstead of using his first phase e#perience to (ork on mastering
the basic skills of deepening and maintaining Roman immediately
indulged in comple# e#periments (hich is (hy his multiple entries
(ithin the same phase (ere brief of poor 2uality and not used
effecti&ely. 5ut this is all typical during initial e#periences and a lot
(as still accomplished especially considering that a direct techni2ue
(as used. The relati&e length of the phase (as achie&ed mainly
thanks to complying (ith the single (ay to maintain the phase I
repeated separation (hich Roman managed to do fi&e times.

+oD 0
Ale-ander &yrenko>
StudentD ,osco6J 9ussia
My first entry happened at night( - &as lying in "ed and thin+ing
a"out the phase, as - had "een una"le to fall asleep for a &hile( -
do*ed off for a $o$ent and then a&o+e again, this ti$e already in
the proper state, and then easily rolled out B$ore or less
unconsciously and refle#ively)( - &ent deeper "y $eans of touching
and then falling headfirst( -t is a pity that -.ve already forgotten a lot
of the e#perience, "ut - do re$e$"er that after deepening - fell right
do&n onto the yard of $y grand$other.s house, "ut then lost
consciousness, and so - returned into $y "ody and rolled out of it
several ti$es( - &as una"le to sharpen all $y senses' 5hen -
deepened one sense Btouch, for e#a$ple), another Bi(e( sight) &ould
fade a&ay( %fter that, - have a gap in $y $e$ory concerning $y
travels Bconsciousness and lucidity &ere &ea+, and - fell asleep and
>resurfaced? several ti$es), "ut - re$e$"er having "een to a lot of
places(
0ereAs ho& the episode ended' - dove headfirst into &ater fro$ a
high "oard Bafter first having deepened a "it), and then $y sense of
touch gre& sharper' - felt >&ater? and hit $y head against a very
soft >"otto$(? - resu$ed the interrupted fall through &illpo&er, "ut
then it occurred to $e that $y grand$other &anted to &a+e $e up(
My level of a&areness &as not 4uite ade4uate, as it did not occur to
$e that - &as actually sleeping in a dor$itory, and not at $y
grand$otherAs house( That.s &hy - decided that - needed to return to
$y "ody( % sharp fall occurred right after that thought, and &as
follo&ed "y sensations si$ilar to those one e#periences &hen hung-
over(
<uestionsC .as a direct or indirect techni2ue applied/ .hat
made the implementation of the techni2ue successful/ .hy (as
1le#ander e%ected into his grandmotherEs yard/ .hile deepening
ho( could the problem of the senses being enhanced only one at a
time ha&e been sol&ed/ .hy did the practitioner ha&e gaps in his
memory/ .hat (ere the main problems associated (ith maintaining
the phase/
Ans6ers and Co((entsC 7espite the brief lapse in
consciousness the techni2ue used (as a direct one and that &ery
lapse facilitated the immediate emergence of the necessary state e&en
though this (as 1le#anderDs first e#perience. The e%ection into his
grandmotherEs yard (as spontaneous and (as most likely caused by
some preceding thoughts about the yard or being in a habit of going
there. Une#pected translocation often occurs (hen deepening (hile
falling headfirst.
Ouite possibly in order to a&oid ha&ing the senses of sight and
touch enhance only one at a time he should ha&e simultaneously
applied the techni2ues of touching and looking out. 1s for
maintaining the phase there (ere three main problems that (ere also
direct causes of the gaps in 1le#anderEs memory- little depth lack of
a clear plan of action and non"compliance (ith the rules for
maintaining the phase F(ith the e#ception of multiple entries after
return to the bodyG.
+oD 1
S>yatosla> Barano>
StudentD Per(J 9ussia
- &o+e up on $y side( - didn.t feel li+e sleeping any$ore, "ut -
closed $y eyes any&ay( 5hen - lay do&n on $y "ac+, - i$$ediately
felt the sensation that - &as a"out to fall fro$ the couch B- &as lying
on the edge), and so$e +ind of lapse occurred, as if - &as "eing
pulled so$e&here( - lay do&n once again, and this "u**ing started,
and a green light appeared "efore $y eyes( - lay "ac+ even further,
and $y eyelids started to flutter( - thought that - $ight fall fro$ the
couch at that $o$ent, "ut then $y vision ca$e to $e, and - o"served
that - &as already lying on the floor ne#t to the couch, - got up on $y
feet and noticed that the roo$ &as >spinning? as if - &ere drun+, "ut
everything 4uite 4uic+ly &ent "ac+ to nor$al( %t that very $o$ent, -
understood that this &as it, The phase itself,
-n ecstasy, - forgot a"out all the techni4ues and &ent to loo+
a"out the roo$( 2verything &as 1ust li+e in reality, "ut so$e things
&ere out of place( - tried to levitate and "ent "ac+&ards, and &as
so$eho& thrust outside( -t &as dus+ out there, and there &as a lot of
sno& on the ground( - &ent around the house and tried to levitate( -
&as a"le to soar up&ards, and sa& the hori*on and sunset( But then -
"egan to lose altitude( %fter having flo&n to the &indo& on the other
side of the house, - &anted to go up to the roof, "ut then a foul
occurred( -n a fraction of a second, - had the sensation that - &as
>no&here?( But then, $y real eyes opened B&ith difficulty) and there
&as once again the feeling of so$e sort of lapse( %&areness &as di$
during the phase, apparently due to not having gotten enough sleep(
<uestionsC .hat kind of phase entrance techni2ue did 4&yatosla&
use/ .hich specific techni2ue produced results/ .hich separation
techni2ue (as employed/ )f separation (as unsuccessful (hich
techni2ue should ha&e been immediately used/ .hich important
actions did he not perform enough after entering the phase/ .hat
should ha&e been done after the foul/ .hy (as a(areness dim
during the phase/
Ans6ers and Co((entaryC 1n indirect techni2ue (as
employed. 'o phase state creation techni2ues (ere employed by
4&yatosla&. )nstead separation immediately (orked through rolling
back(ards. )f separation (ere unsuccessful he should ha&e
proceeded (ith obser&ing images (hich (ould ha&e been possible
(ith the green light.
7eepening (as not immediately performed no effort (as made to
maintain and there (as no appro#imation of a plan of actionJ
ho(e&er this is not a crucial factor during initial e#periences.
1nother attempt to enter the phase should ha&e been made upon
returning to the body but this (as also forgotten. 1(areness (as dim
and memory (as (eak during the phase because of the initial
shallo(ness of the state (hich (as reflected in the perception of the
surrounding and also the thought processes.
+oD 3
Oleg Sushchenko
Sports(anD ,osco6J 9ussia
Mast night - spent a"out an hour developing the interplay of
i$ages in $y $ind after - no left felt any feeling of +inesthetic sense(
- &as lying on $y "ac+ in an unco$forta"le position( %fter sliding
to&ards sleep for so$e ti$e, - felt slight vi"rations and echoes of
sounds fro$ the drea$ &orld, "ut the unco$forta"le position still
hindered $e( -n the end, - thought the hec+ &ith it, and decided to lie
do&n ho&ever &as co$forta"le, and turned over to lie on $y
sto$ach( 3espite the fact that the $ove$ent upset the process, after
a"out five $inutes the state "egan to return and "uild up( - &as a"le
to get a little vi"ration this ti$e, although - &as una"le to a$plify it(
- dre& a picture of $y +itchen in $y $ind, and "ecause the i$ages in
that state &ere really vivid, strong, and realistic, after so$e ti$e -
understood that not only &ere $y attention and a&areness there, "ut
so &ere $y "odily sensations( - &as 4uite surprised that the phase
had "een so easy to fall in to Bthere &as no dou"t that this &as the
phase)(
- 1u$ped out through the &indo& and "egan to fly around the
courtyard( %ctually, it &as the first ti$e that - had flo&n only upon a
single $ental co$$and, &ithout any physical effort, as occurs
during drea$s( The courtyard "ore only 17 si$ilarity to its real-
life counterpart, "ut - &as not at all surprised "y this, and - si$ply
en1oyed it as $uch as - could, as - &as a"le see and &as not
i$$ediately thro&n out( But, after having loo+ed at and ta+en in the
city, the thought of &hether or not this &as the phase and not 1ust a
lucid drea$ occurred( - &as so conscious in the drea$ that - &as
a"le to +no& a"out and co$prehend such ter$s, and differentiate
"et&een the$ - can you i$agineG, - have to add that - gave little
attention to $y $e$ory, so - can.t say ho& $uch of $y >self-
a&areness? &as there, "ut - &as a&are enough to "e a"le to
differentiate "et&een the phase and a lucid drea$ Bor at least thin+
a"out the difference)( - even &ent and as+ed people around if it &as
the phase or a lucid drea$( Sounds funny, doesnAt itG The funniest
thing &as that they ans&ered that it &as a different &orld, and they
refused to discuss the topic any further &ith $e( Then, - decided to
not get $y $ind all $i#ed up and 1ust go &ith the plot, &hich turned
out to "e 4uite long and uninterrupted, - recalled a $o$ent fro$ the
day "efore ho& - had lain do&n and induced the phase &hile lying on
$y "ac+, and ho& - had turned over and flo&n a&ay( - recalled all
this periodically during the course of the phase, and reali*ed that -
should try to as+ a"out &hat had "een going on &ith $e on the foru$
later(
Then, later in the phase, - found $yself in a "ase$ent( %s there
&as 1ust a really nasty s$ell there, - decided that - had already had
enough and that it &as ti$e to go "ac+( That happened even $ore
easily, as soon as - thought a"out going "ac+, a vi"ration as light as
a "ree*e &ent through $e and then - &as "ac+ in $y "ody &ith full
a&areness and a &ell-rested "ody and $ind( - &as co$pletely
refreshed, %nd that.s despite the fact that - re$e$"er everything,
every second of the drea$, fro$ the $o$ent - started flying,
<uestionsC .hich type of techni2ue helped Oleg enter the phase/
.hat initially made it harder for him to enter the phase and could
this ha&e had a positi&e effect on later results/ .hat can be said of
techni2ues related to &ibrations in the conte#t of OlegEs entry into the
phase/ .hich specific techni2ue brought him into the phase/ .hich
initial actions should ha&e been taken upon entry into the phase/
.hat (as lacking that could ha&e lead to producti&e use of the
phase/ .as it (orth(hile to immediately translocate by %umping
through the (indo(/ .hat (as the cause of reflection on (hether
the e#perience (as the phase or a conscious dream/ .as it beneficial
to try to offhandedly learn from ob%ects (hat type of state this (as/
.hy did the desire to return back to the body arise and (hat could
ha&e caused it/
Ans6ers and Co((entaryC Oleg entered the phase using a
direct techni2ue. 6e (as initially unable to enter due to the
uncomfortable position that he had assumed although lapses in
consciousness into short dreams did occur. 'e&ertheless the initially
unsuccessful techni2ue still ended in a positi&e final outcome because
the state that Oleg (as in (as close to the phase. 6o(e&er attention
should not ha&e been gi&en to &ibration amplification techni2ues
especially straining the brain and straining the body (ithout using
muscles as they can be detrimental during direct techni2ues.
The techni2ue of &isuali=ation (as used immediately before
entering the phase instead of obser&ing images (hich is used more
often. Oleg deliberately con%ured the obser&ed images instead of
searching for them in front of himself (hich is (here the difference
bet(een the techni2ues lies. 6o(e&er he did not perform deepening
upon entering the phase. 1dditionally he had no clear plan of action
to ensure that the phase (ould be producti&e 4tarting to translocate
by %umping through (indo(s should only be done by those (ith a
certain amount of e#perience since beginners sometimes percei&e
reality to be the phase or the phase to be reality.
The reason for the reflection on the nature of the phenomenon
(as due to terminological confusion (hich is 2uite (idespread. )f a
practitioner is a(are but does not feel the body as in the physical
(orld then it can be assumed that the phase has been entered. This is
(hy there (as no reason to in2uire about this among animate ob%ects.
7eliberately returning to the body (as a big mistake. There (as
no reason to thro( a(ay an opportunity to tra&el and use the phase.
5eginners are not often afforded such an opportunity. The reason for
the return to the body in this case is most likely found in the absence
of a plan of action and lack of clear understanding of ho( the phase
might be used for practical aims.
+oD
Ale-ander ;eleko>
Co(puter Progra((erD Saint PetersburgJ 9ussia
- tried all night to use the %stral :atapult that cues you &hen
you.re drea$ing, "ut - gave up on the idea after several unsuccessful
a&a+enings and si$ply fell asleep( 5hen -A$ drea$ing - usually
$ove "y ta+ing great leaps, $uch further than a +angaroo, a"out
1-8 yards( This happens regularly in $y drea$s, and - usually
i$$ediately reali*e that -A$ in a drea$( 3uring one of the leaps, -
reali*ed &hile air"orne that - &as drea$ing and also reali*ed that -
&as a"le to land in a s$all dirty pond( %s e#pected, - landed right in
the pond and &ent deep under the &ater( %nd at that very $o$ent, -
found $yself in the stencil, &ith $y hands and head half stuc+ in it(
- got a little nervous that this atte$pt &ould also "e unsuccessful,
and so - i$$ediately tried to separate fro$ $y "ody( - &as una"le to
get $y head or hands out, and for the first ti$e - tried to turn around
round $y a#is and $anaged to get out( Then - either slipped do&n or
fell fro$ the "ed, "ut - did not feel any pain( - cra&led for 1-2 $eters
and then felt that - could go "ac+( - started to touch the rug and so$e
other thing, though - don.t +no& e#actly &hat it &as as it &as dar+,
and, lo and "ehold' &ithin 2-8 seconds - pro"a"ly felt &hat s$all
+ittens feel &hen their eyes open for the first ti$e( 2verything &as
foggy and "lurry at first, "ut then a picture started to appear, the
roo$ filled &ith light, and colors "eca$e "right and vivid( - tried
very hard to restrain $y e#cite$ent, and, to $y surprise, &as a"le to(
- &al+ed around $y apart$ent thin+ing a"out &hat - should do(
Reali*ing that - did not have that $uch ti$e, - decided to tal+ to an
elderly $an &ho &ould ans&er $y 4uestions( - decided that there
&ould "e an o$niscient elderly $an "ehind the apart$entAs front
door, &hich - &as a"out to open( %nd there he &as, half-"ald, a"out
K years old, in a grey coat &aiting for $e( - as+ed hi$ the 4uestion,
>5hat should - do to get into the phase $ore oftenG? But he started
to tell $e a"out ho& he &as raped as a child( %nd to "e $ore
precise, this &as already not an elderly $an, "ut an elderly &o$an( -
&as not very interested in hearing her story, thus - tried to $ove
a&ay fro$ her, suggesting that &e could tal+ later( But the elderly
&o$an &as persistent, and - did not &ant to offend her, "ecause -
thought that this &as an unusual drea$ &ith its o&n set of rules, and
na$ely that once you have as+ed an old &o$an a 4uestion, you are
supposed to "e courteous and listen to the entire ans&er(
- &ent &ith her to the +itchen of $y apart$ent( The telephone
suddenly rang( - got scared that the telephone &as ringing in $y
apart$ent and &ould &a+e $e up, &hich is &hy - i$$ediately
started to loo+ at $y hand in order to $aintain( But the sensations
&ere 4uite sta"le, and - stopped doing that( Then, $e and this lady
&anted to coo+ so$ething in $y +itchen( She said that - could heat a
frying pan &ithout gas( But - instead decided to try the techni4ue of
putting the hands together and "lo&ing on the$, and returned "ac+
into $y "ody(
<uestionsC .hich type of the entry into the phase did 1le#ander
describe/ .as the cueing program of any help/ .hich type of anchor
(as the leaping/ .hy (as the onset of consciousness immediately
follo(ed by a transition into the stencil i.e. the real body though not
completely/ .hich separation techni2ue helped him to get out of his
body again/ .hich techni2ue (as used for deepening/ .hich
techni2ue for materiali=ing an ob%ect (as used correctly/ .hat
should the procedure for obtaining information ha&e been started
(ith/ .hat importance does a polite attitude to(ards elderly (omen
in the phase ha&e/ .hy (as the return to body possible/ .hat did
1le#ander either forget to do or forget to record right after the foul/
Ans6ers and Co((entsC 1le#ander described an entry into the
phase through dream consciousness. 5y and large the onset of
consciousness (as facilitated by prior (ork (ith the cueing program
(hich though it failed to yield results strengthened the necessary
intention to enter the phase. The leaping that accompanied the onset
of consciousness may be compared (ith the sensations of le&itation
that often lead to practitioners achie&ing dream consciousness. 4ince
the techni2ues for deepening and maintaining (ere not used at the
moment of dream consciousness a return to the body though partial
naturally occurred.
Furthermore 1le#ander managed to apply a separation techni2ue
that most resembled climbing out. 6e then managed to deepen
correctly by means of touching and immediately felt a result. 7espite
the lack of a plan of action the practitioner competently decided to
do something useful and employed the techni2ue of finding through a
door in order to locate an animate source of information. 6e should
ha&e first tried to test the sub%ect by asking special 2uestions to
determine if the ob%ect (ould be able to pro&ide information Fsee
,hapter 1AG.
5eing polite to animate ob%ects in the phase is the prerogati&e of
each person on an indi&idual basis but it hardly has any real basis.
Most likely the return to the body (as triggered by a failure to
maintain e#cessi&e thinking or temporary passi&ity. Upon e#iting
the phase 1le#ander should ha&e tried to immediately return.
6o(e&er he failed to do so e&en though he had returned to the phase
after e#iting dream consciousness. 4uch a step should ha&e been
ob&ious due to an incomplete connection to the body.
+oD "
Boris Bender
,o>ie #echnicianJ E-perienced Practitioner of the PhaseD
,osco6J 9ussia
- "eca$e conscious in $y drea$ al$ost i$$ediately after falling
asleep( - &as in $y apart$ent standing in the corridor( Being
surprised "y having so suddenly found $yself in the phase, - started
to touch the &alls &ith $y hands to test their fir$ness or, Orealness,O
as &ell as to intensify the phase "y touching( - entered the roo$(
There &as a "ed standing ne#t to the &all, &ith $y $other sleeping
on it( - could not see her face, only her "ody under the "lan+et( The
roo$ and corridor &ere e#act replicas of their real-life counterparts(
5hile thin+ing a"out $y sleeping $other, - suddenly started to
feel so$e&hat uneasy( 5hen - approached the &indo&, - sa& a
grotes4ue landscape "ehind it that &as si$ilar to pictures fro$
$ovies a"out catastrophes' a &asteland, houses in ruins, odd pileups
of "uilding $aterials, sla"s of concrete, gar"age, craters fro$
e#plosions here and there, and - noticed hu$an figures in so$e
places(
Fearing a foul caused "y the fact that - &as ta+ing in a
panora$ic vie& Bthe vie& fro$ the &indo& spanned 1H degrees and
cut off at the hori*on, &hich is in fact al$ost e#actly as the vie& fro$
$y apart$ent is in real life), - turned "ac+ into the roo$ and started
to touch the &ardro"e, and then +nelt do&n to touch the floor( %ll the
&hile, $y fear had "een gro&ing stronger and stronger' "oth out of
thin+ing a"out $y sleeping $other and due to the vie& fro$ the
&indo&( %n#iety turned into real fear &ithin a $atter of several
seconds, and then graduated into terror and panic( - lost the a"ility
to thin+ critically( - had only one thought' - had to go "ac+ to $y
"ody( - darted "ac+ to $y "ed and suddenly found $yself lying on it(
- closed $y eyes, "ut could not understand if - &ere in $y real "ody
or still in the phase( My terror gre& even stronger &hen - half-
opened $y eyes and sa& that $y $other &as getting up fro$ her "ed(
She loo+ed li+e a character fro$ a horror $ovie and apparently &as
hostile to $e(
- &anted to disappear, dissolve, and &a+e up, - hectically tried to
recall the techni4ues for an e$ergency e#it fro$ the phase, "ut &ith
poor results' - tried to free*e, rela# and touch $y fingers to $y toes
in order to feel a connection &ith $y real "ody( %t so$e $o$ents -
felt li+e - had it, thin+ing, >The connection had "een restored,? -
opened $y eyes, "ut reali*ed that - &as still in the phase &hen - sa&
that the roo$ had changed, and &as no& a&ash &ith gar"age(
The fact that the atte$pts +ept ending &ith false a&a+enings &as
driving $e cra*y( - &as especially shoc+ed &hen - got up after one of
the false a&a+enings and sa& $y $other standing at $y "ed, still
loo+ing threateningly at $e, li+e a va$pire or a *o$"ie fro$ a
horror $ovie( Elus, she started to reach out to&ard $e &ith her
hands,
- nevertheless +ept on and tried to free*e and &iggle $y toes, this
ti$e &ithout opening $y eyes, and not chec+ing &here - &as( -
started to cal$ do&n after so$e ti$e, "ut - &as una"le to feel $y
real "ody, &hich &as confir$ed "y the fact that sounds &ere co$ing
in fro$ the phase' - heard sparro&s chirping outside the &indo&,
though it reality it &as too late for sparro&s to "e out( 0o&ever, the
chirping and the associations that it "rought Bi(e( day, &ar$th,
sparro&s, and sun), pro"a"ly helped $e a lot and cal$ed $e do&n,
as - finally $anaged to sense $y real "ody and found $yself in
reality( /evertheless, after - got up, - i$$ediately started to verify
for a"out half a $inute that - &as no longer in the phase "y touching
o"1ects, $a+ing sure that they &ere hard, and feeling all of $y "odily
sensations(
<uestionsC .hy (as there a risk that 5oris could return to his
body (hen taking in the &ie( from the (indo(/ 6o( could 5oris
ha&e e#amined the panoramic &ie( from the (indo( (ithout
(orrying about a foul/ .hich techni2ue for deepening and
!maintaining$ (as employed se&eral times/ .hat (ould ha&e
happened if 5oris translocated from the source of the fear to another
place/ 6o( could he ha&e o&ercome this problem/ .hy (as 5oris
unable to easily e#it the phase and (hy (ere all of the techni2ues that
he kne( of no practical use/
Ans6ers and Co((entsC .hen e#amining distant ob%ects in the
phase there is al(ays a risk of returning to oneDs body because the
acti&ity is rela#ing and rela#ation is detrimental to the length of a
phase. 5oris could ha&e continued to take in the &ie( by
simultaneously keeping up &ibrations periodically e#amining his
hands or rubbing them together. 7uring the entire length of 5orisDs
phase he performed sensory amplification by touching to deepen and
maintain the phase.
)f he tried to run a(ay from his mother to another place in the
phase she probably (ould ha&e caught up (ith him there any(ay.
6e should ha&e tried to yell at her in an aggressi&e tone. This (ould
ha&e helped him to o&ercome his fear and either scare the ob%ect
a(ay or make it more agreeable. Problems (ith an emergency e#it
from the phase arose because it (as the beginning of the night and
the mind still needed to dream and thus kept pulling him into that
process.
+oD %
Ale-ei #eslenko
I# EngineerJ E-perienced Practitioner of the PhaseD ,osco6J
9ussia
%ctually, - &as not planning to travel that night, "ut &hen - &o+e
up around $idnight - decided to try to enter the phase nevertheless( -
started to perfor$ phanto$ $ove$ents &ith $y ar$s, "ut then a
strong sleepy lethargy overca$e $e and - suddenly &anted to give
up $y atte$pts to enter the phase and si$ply fall asleep( 0o&ever, -
&as persistent and continued to perfor$ phanto$ $ove$ents &ith
$y ar$s( -nstead of feeling the usual vi"rations that occur &hen this
techni4ue is perfor$ed, - si$ply fell asleep and continued the
phanto$ $ove$ents &hile drea$ing( Because of that, $y
consciousness apparently did not fall asleep co$pletely, and -
"eca$e a&are that - &as drea$ing(
- i$$ediately cli$"ed out of $y "ody( There &as no vision,
conscious a&areness &as no $ore than 67, so the phase &as not
that deep( -n order to $aintain the phase, - i$$ediately started
chaotically touching everything around $e( -t helped( Fision ca$e,
though it &as $ur+y( - then found $yself in $y apart$ent( - decided
to strive to deepen( 2ach ti$e that - e#ercised that techni4ue, the
phase "eca$e deeper and deeper( %fter - had achieved a sta"le
phase, - decided that it &ould "e good to gra" a snac+ and headed
for the fridge( - should add that - &as on a strict diet at the ti$e and
&as craving so$ething s&eet or fried( 0o&ever, &hen - opened the
fridge, - &as 4uite disappointed( There &as a lot of food in the fridge,
"ut all of it re4uired preparation Bra& $eat, fish, dill, etc()( 0o&ever,
there &as a "ottle of spar+ling $ineral &ater on a special lo&er shelf
in the fridge( 5ithout giving it any thought, - too+ the "ottle and
started to chug it(
%ll of the sensations &ere 1ust as in real life' - felt the "u""les
fro$ the car"onation, that peculiar taste that $ineral &ater has, and
also ho& the &ater &ent do&n $y throat( -n general, everything &as
4uite realistic, though there &as no sensation of $y sto$ach filling
up &ith &ater and, $oreover, the &ater felt so$e&hat dry( -t sounds
funny, "ut that very feeling of &ater.s dryness spoiled $y overall
i$pression so$e&hat( %fter a foul, - reali*ed that a possi"le reason
for this $ight have "een dryness in the $outh of $y real "ody(
<sually, if there are, for e#a$ple, candies in the +itchen or in the
fridge, - actually ta+e a handful of the$ and consu$e the$ &hile
traveling through the phase(
%fter going to the fridge, - &anted to see so$ething interesting( -
decided to e$ploy the techni4ue for creating o"1ects and people, and
so - closed $y eyes and focused on the i$age of a girl &ho$ -
&anted to see at that very $o$ent( - affir$ed $y desire, and - then
opened $y eyes, concentrating on the area to $y side( The air gre&
$isty at first, and then the person - &as e#pecting $ateriali*ed out of
the air, and ca$e to life, see$ingly fully autono$ous and &ith free
&ill - she had the sa$e $anner of spea+ing as in real life, and acted
in the sa$e &ay( The foul happened &hile $y conversation &ith the
girl &as in full s&ingP
<uestionsC .hich type of the techni2ue did 1le#ei ultimately
use/ .hy did lethargy and dro(siness arise during phantom
(iggling/ .hat should be done in this type of situation/ .hat (as
most likely lacking (hen the indirect techni2ue (as performed and
(hy did the e#perience end (ith 1le#ei falling asleep/ .hat
techni2ues for deepening (ere used/ .hat could ha&e been done to
2uickly fill the fridge (ith ready"to"eat food/ .hich techni2ue for
finding an ob%ect (as used (ith regard to the girl/ .hat else could
ha&e been used for the same purpose considering 1le#eiEs actions/
.hat should ha&e been done immediately after the foul/ 6o( many
practical applications of the phase did 1le#ei manage to try/
Ans6ers and Co((entsC The entry to the phase happened
because 1le#ei had become a(are that he (as dreaming (hile he
rightly tried to resist the sudden tiredness and dro(siness o&er the
course of the unsuccessful attempt (ith the indirect techni2ue of
phantom (iggling. Usually such dro(siness signifies that a phase is
approaching signaling a need for aggression acti&eness and attention
in order to o&ercome inertia and enter the phase. 6o(e&er
attenti&eness (as lacking so 1le#ei fell asleep. 6o(e&er his desire
to enter the phase (as so strong that the phantom (iggling continued
e&en (hile he (as dreaming causing him to e#perience dream
consciousness.
1mong techni2ues employed for deepening (ere sensory
amplification through touching and %ogging. )t (ould ha&e been
sufficient to employ the techni2ue of finding through a door to ensure
that the fridge (as properly stocked. For e#ample 1le#ei should
ha&e closed the door on the refrigerator focused his attention on a
full stock of snacks and food and then opened the door to disco&er
that e&erything heDd en&isioned (as there.
The techni2ue for finding an ob%ect through transformation (as
used to make the girl appear but this techni2ue should be considered
only by e#perienced practitioners because it can lead to a foul in case
of insufficient concentration. 5efore employing the techni2ue 1le#ei
shut his eyes and only then imagined the girl right in front of him.
6e could ha&e immediately created her using the techni2ue of closed
eyes (hich usually is easier to do since there is no direct &isual
contact (ith surroundings.
Upon returning to his body he should ha&e tried to separate
again. 1ltogether 1le#ei managed to and make progress in t(o
specific applied tasks though did not complete them satisfactorily.
E-ercises for Chapter "
#asks
Try to assess the e#periences described abo&e using the rubric
belo(. The ans(ers are located in the appendi#.
*-Point Syste( for Assessing the <uality
of Out-of-Body E-periences @PhasesA
7eliberate entry into the phase using any techni2ue Q1
The phase (orld (as realistic or (as made realistic Q1
Phase (as of a&erage or abo&e"a&erage duration F+ minutes or
moreG
Q1
7eliberate use of the phase to (ork to(ards a specific goal Q1
7eliberately studying the phase or e#perimenting (ith it (hile
in it.
Q1
)f there is some doubt any regarding any item only half a point
should be a(arded.
Chapter % - Putting a 2ace on the Pheno(enon
Stephen ;aBerge
4tephen 0a5erge (as born in 1@:> in the
United 4tates. 1t the age of 1@ he recei&ed a
5achelorDs 7egree in mathematics from 1ri=ona
4tate Uni&ersity after (hich he enrolled as a
graduate student in the ,hemistry program at
4tanford Uni&ersity. )n 1@<@ he took an
academic lea&e of absence.
6e returned to 4tanford in 1@>> and began
studying the human mind including sub%ects
related to dreaming. 0a5erge recei&ed his Ph.7. in psychophysiology
in 1@?A. 6e founded the 0ucidity )nstitute in 1@?>.
4tephen 0a5erge has made the largest scientific contribution to
the study of phase states. )t suffices to say that 0a5erge (as the first
in the (orld to pro&e during a full"fledged scientific e#periment that
it is possible to become conscious (hile dreaming This (as done
through logging specific signals made (ith the eyes by a person
dreaming (hile sleeping under measurement instruments. These
e#periments also pro&ed that eye mo&ement in the physical body and
percei&ed body are synchronous.
Mucid 3rea$ing first published in 1@?; is 0a5ergeEs most (ell"
kno(n book. 2#ploring the 5orld of Mucid 3rea$ing, a book that
0a5erge (rote (ith 6o(ard Rheingold (as published in 1@@A. )t
(as mainly thanks to the efforts of 0a5erge that mind"machines for
achie&ing dream consciousness (ere created such as 7ream0ight
'o&a7reamer and 7reamMaker.
The key feature of 0a5ergeDs (ork and achie&ements is an
absolutely pragmatic approach to the nature of the phenomenon.
1rguably he is one of the fe( authors and researchers totally lacking
in irrationality. E&erything that can be read and learned from his
books is &erifiable and accessible for e&eryone (ith no peddling of
out"of"this"(orld superpo(ers.
Carlos Castaneda
7ue to ,arlos ,astanedaDs desire to follo( the
spiritual practice of the .arriorDs Path (hich
entails erasing oneDs personal history the details
of his biography are unclear. 1s far as
,astanedaDs early years are concerned it can only
be stated that he (as born outside of the United
4tates sometime bet(een 1@+; and 1@8;. 6e
enrolled at the Uni&ersity of ,alifornia 0os
1ngeles FU,01G in the 1@<As (here he recei&ed a Ph.7. in
anthropology on the basis of his books.
,astanedaDs entire life path (as de&oted to studying the teachings
of a certain Cuan Matus or don Cuan ,achora. )t is more than likely
that his persona is a composite"image of an )ndian 4haman a
sorcerer and an heir of the culture of the ancient !Toltecs$.
,astaneda (rote a do=en booksJ ho(e&er the book The %rt of
3rea$ing F1@@8G has the most to do (ith the phase state. )t contains
se&eral effecti&e techni2ues for entering the phase through dream
consciousness. 6is sub%ect matter is soaked in a large amount of
mysticism and &irtually de&oid of any pragmatism.
7espite the fact that the main orientation of ,astanedaDs (ork did
not touch upon the phase state he ne&ertheless became one of the
founding fathers of this field as his general popularity reached
massi&e proportions (orld(ide.
,arlos ,astaneda passed a(ay in 1@@?.
9obert AD ,onroe
Robert Monroe (as born in the United 4tates
in 1@1;. )n 1@8> he graduated from Ohio 4tate
Uni&ersity (ith a degree in Engineering. 6e
(orked for some time as a radio program
producer and director until he established his o(n
radio company in 'e( Pork (hich rapidly
e#panded.
)n 1@;< his company also conducted a study
about the effect of sound (a&es on the abilities of
the mind.
)n 1@;? Monroe had an accidental personal e#perience (ith the
phase phenomenon (hich strongly stoked his interest in the sub%ect
to (hich he (ould de&ote his entire career. )n 1@>: he founded the
Monroe )nstitute (hich (as entirely de&oted to studying unusual
states of consciousness and the ability to influence them through
audio stimulation and other technologies. One of its main
achie&ements (as the creation of the 6emi"4ync system (hich (as
designed to help a person reach altered states of consciousness
including out"of"body states by synchroni=ing the t(o hemispheres
of the brain.
6is first book Journeys Out of the Body (as published in 1@>1.
T(o books then follo(ed- Far Journeys F1@?;G and <lti$ate
Journey F1@@:G.
Robert Monroe has so far made the largest contribution to(ard
populari=ing the phase state. 6o(e&er he understood the phase more
as an actual e#it of the mind from the body (hich is (hy the term
!out"of"body e#perience$ FO5EG (as introduced. The book Journeys
Out of the Body (as such a massi&e success that Monroe 2uickly
became an undisputed authority in the field.
6o(e&er the large influence of mysticism on MonroeDs (ork and
&ie(s cannot be ignored. This is especially apparent after his second
book. The ma%ority of phenomena described in the book ha&e not
been &erified in practice. The only attempt at conducting a full"
fledged scientific e#periment pro&ing that the mind left the body (as
unsuccessful. )n the end typical misconceptions about the phase
became (idespread as did a(areness of the e#istence of out"of"body
e#periences.
Robert Monroe passed a(ay in 1@@;.
Patricia Garfield
Patricia 3arfield (as born in 1@8: in the
United 4tates. From the age of 1: she kept an
uninterrupted daily dream %ournal that (ould allo(
her and all of humanity great insight into dreams
phenomena associated (ith the phase.
4he (as one of the founders of The 1ssociation
for the 4tudy of 7reams. 7r. 3arfield holds a
Ph.7. in clinical psychology.
4he is the author of a great number of books (ith the 1@>: best"
seller :reative 3rea$ing being the most (idely lauded. )t (as one of
the first pieces of literature to approach the phase state in a practical
and non"specialist (ay and recei&ed (orld(ide interest and
appreciation. The book contains good practical guidelines and also
describes the dreaming practices of &arious cultures.
Syl>an ,uldoon
4yl&an Muldoon (as born in the United
4tates in 1@A8. 6e is considered to be the
1merican pioneer in the study of the phase
although he used the esoteric term astral. 6e
inad&ertently (oke up in the phase at the age of
1+ (here he sa( a cord connecting his percei&ed
body to his real body. Muldoon first thought that
he (as dying during the e#perience although he
e&entually concluded that this (as an instance of
!astral pro%ection$. 6e had repeated e#perience (ith the
phenomenon but Muldoon (as still unable to become an ad&anced
practitioner due to a lack of full control o&er the practice.
1fter coordinating efforts (ith 6ere(ard ,arrington the famous
1merican in&estigator of the unkno(n the t(o published the
sensational %ointly authored book The Ero1ection of the %stral Body
in 1@+@. The authors published t(o other books- The :ase for %stral
Ero1ection F1@8<G and The Eheno$ena of %stral Ero1ection F1@;1G.
7espite a large ser&ing of esotericism MuldoonDs books
Fespecially the first oneG contain a lot of helpful practical information
and e#planation of the most di&erse phenomena that can occur during
the phase. 6o(e&er Muldoon is considered to be the greatest
populari=er of irrational esoteric terms and theories (hich
subse2uently became 2uite (idespread.
4yl&an Muldoon passed a(ay in 1@>1.
Charles ;eadbeater
,harles 0eadbeater (as born in England in
1?:> F1?;: according to some sourcesG. 1fter
dropping out of O#ford due to hard times
0eadbeater became an ordained priest but then
became 2uite acti&e in the occult. This led to his
becoming a member of the Theosophical 4ociety
in 1??8. 0eadbeater became one of its most
famous participants.
The combination of a bright mind scientific
kno(ledge and interest in the paranormal led him
to publish many books on many di&erse topics. One of them
3rea$s' 5hat They %re and 0o& They %re :aused F1?@?G (as one
of the first (orks to touch upon the phenomenon of the phase.
0eadbeaterDs (riting is saddled (ith a ton of esoteric terms and
theories. )n it the term astral plane is predominantly used for the
phase. 'e&ertheless the book is not (ithout some helpful guidelines
concerning techni2ues.
,harles 0eadbeater passed a(ay in 1@8:.
9obert Bruce
Robert 5ruce (as born in England in 1@;;.
6e has performed his lifeEs (ork (hile li&ing in
1ustralia. 1fter studying and promoting
dissociati&e phenomena for many years by the
beginning of the +1
st
century he had become one
of the leading authorities in the field. 6e is also a
specialist in many other paranormal fields of
study.
Robert 5ruce (rote se&eral books the most
important and (ell kno(n of (hich is %stral 3yna$ics F1@@@G. The
author holds 2uite open esoteric &ie(s (hich are &ery strongly
reflected in his theories and terminology. The helpful practical
guidelines in his books are 2uite often loaded (ith a large amount of
information that has not been &erified or pro&en by anyone. Robert
5ruce is also a propagator of typical superstitions and stereotypes
concerning the phase phenomenon.
9ichard )ebster
Richard .ebster (as born in 'e( Realand
(here he still resides.
6e is the author of about ;A publications that
ha&e sold many millions of copies around the
(orld. 6o(e&er only one of them %stral Travel
for Beginners is completely de&oted to the phase
state. The book is saturated (ith (idespread
misconceptions about the phase phenomenon and
misguided theories trying to e#plain it. The techni2ue"related aspect
of the book is also presented ineffecti&ely.
)t is 2uite likely that the author himself has no practical
e#perience (hich can also be said for the contents of his other
do=ens of books de&oted to &arious topics.
Charles #art
,harles Tart (as born in the United 4tates in
1@8>. 6e recei&ed his Ph. 7. in psychology in
1@<8 at the Uni&ersity of 'orth ,arolina. Tart
also recei&ed training at 4tanford Uni&ersity. 6e
(as one of the founders of transpersonal
psychology.
6e became one of the most preeminent
researchers of unusual states of a(areness after
the publication of %ltered States of :onsciousness F1@<@G the first
book that he (orked on. )t (as one of the first books to e#amine
entering the phase through dream consciousness. The book recei&ed
popularity (hen the use 047 and Mari%uana (ere often &ie(ed as
&ehicles to ele&ated consciousness and the book e&en describes the
use of chemical substances in the conte#t of phase states.
Chapter ' ! 2inal #est
The 2uestions on the test may ha&e one or more correct ans(ers
or none of the ans(ers may be correct. Thus the 2uestions must be
read completely through and attention must be paid to their
implications and finer points.
1 studentDs theoretical kno(ledge is considered to be satisfactory
if the correct ans(ers to at least one"half of the 2uestions are gi&en. )f
a score of less than ;AK is recei&ed a student should study the (eak
points again or re"read the entire guidebook. Other(ise it is 2uite
probable that fundamental mistakes (ill be made (hich (ill in turn
interfere (ith indi&idual practice.
)f a score of at least ?AK is achie&ed then a theoretical
kno(ledge of the practice is at an ad&anced le&el (hich (ill surely
ha&e a positi&e effect on the practitionerDs direct e#periences in the
phase.
1ns(ers are in the appendi# at the end of the guidebook.
D +oise and realistic i(ages une-pectedly arise 6hen
perfor(ing the indirect techni$ue of phanto( 6igglingD )hat
can be done:
1G ,ontinue (ith phantom (iggling.
5G 4(itch to obser&ing images or listening in.
,G Try to do all or some of the techni2ues simultaneously.
7G ,hoose the techni2ue (ith the strongest precursors and
continue (ith that one.
"D A practitioner unintentionally opens the eyes for se>eral
seconds upon a6akeningD )hat is the best 6ay to start indirect
techni$ues fro( in this case:
1G 1ttempting to separate.
5G The obser&ing images techni2ue.
,G The rapid eye mo&ement techni2ue.
7G The forced falling asleep techni2ue.
EG )tDs best to not start any techni2ue and fall back to sleep
(ith the intention of rea(akening and trying to do e&erything
again (ithout first mo&ing.
%D )hich actions are preferable for perfor(ing a direct
techni$ue before falling asleep for the night after a long period of
sleep depri>ation or e-haustion:
1G Monotonously performing the obser&ing images
techni2ue.
5G 5eing attenti&e and concentrating on actions.
,G The absence of a free"floating state of consciousness.
7G Ouickly alternating techni2ues.
EG 6igh"2uality rela#ation.
'D ,ild >ibrations occur 6hen perfor(ing a direct techni$ueD
Can the straining the brain techni$ue be used to a(plify the
>ibrations:
1G Pes.
5G 'o.
,G )t may be used but for practical purposes " only (hen a
practitioner is e#hausted or sleep"depri&ed.
7G)t may be used as long as the attempt to enter the phase
is not being made during the day
*D )hich of the actions gi>en belo6 increase the likelihood of
entering the phase through drea( consciousness 6hen used right
before falling asleep:
1G Performing direct techni2ues.
5G )ntending to perform indirect techni2ues upon
a(akening.
,G Recalling dreams from the night before.
7G ,reating a plan of action for use in case of entrance to
the phase in such a (ay.
.D If a6areness occurs at the >ery last (o(ent of a drea( that
fades a6ayJ 6hich of the actions gi>en belo6 should be
undertaken in order to enter the phase as soon as possible:
1G Try to fall asleep again in order to once again become
self"a(are (hile dreaming.
5G )mmediately perform indirect techni2ues.
,G Take a break and perform direct techni2ues later.
7G 4tart to recall that nightDs dreams.
/D )hich of these are (ost likely to produce a $uick phase
entry 6hen a6akening in a state of sleep paralysis:
1G Rela#ation.
5G Falling asleep (ith the intention of becoming self"a(are
(hile in a dream.
,G Mo&ing the physical eyes and tongue.
7G 7irect techni2ues.
0D )hat should be done 6hen spontaneously thro6n fro( the
body 6hile lying do6n or 6aking up in the (iddle of the night:
1G Return to the body and perform appropriate separation
techni2ues.
5G )mplement a predetermined plan of action for the phase.
,G 7eepen immediately.
7G Try to 2uickly establish &ision if it is not already
present.
7G Employ the forced falling asleep techni2ue.
1D )hile trying to enter the phaseJ rolling out 6orks at firstJ
but only partiallyJ and the (o>e(ent cannot be e-tended any
further no (atter 6hat effort is (adeD )hat is it best to do in this
situation:
1G Try to turn back and roll out further once again and
repeat se&eral times.
5G 4tart doing cycles of indirect techni2ues.
,G Take a break and try to separate after se&eral minutes.
7G Try to separate by le&itating getting up or climbing out.
EG Use any indirect techni2ue for phase entry and attempt
rolling out again.
3D A practitioner une-pectedly gets stuck in the floor or 6all
6hile rolling outD )hat should be done to resu(e the phase:
1G Force through the obstacle.
5G Employ translocation techni2ues.
,G 1ttempt to return to the body and roll out again.
7G 5ecome able to locate an e#it from the problem.
EG Perform sensory amplification.
D 7o6 (ay a practitioner deepen the phase 6hile flying
through a dark for(less space 6hile separating:
1G Employ the techni2ue of falling headfirst.
5G There is no (ay to do this.
,G ,reate and amplify &ibrations.
7G 5egin self"palpation.
EG Translocate to another area in the phase and deepen it
through sensory amplification.
"D If deepening techni$ues do not co(pletely 6ork 6ithin *
to %3 secondsJ 6hat can be done:
1G ,ontinue trying to go deeper.
5G E#it from the phase.
,G 1ttempt to return to the body and once use phase
entrance techni2ues.
7G Proceed to performing predetermined actions.
%D )hich techni$ue or 6ay of (aintaining the phase should
be used 6hen teleporting so(e6here 6ith closed eyes:
1G The techni2ue of amplifying and maintaining &ibrations.
5G Tactile sensory amplification feeling the sensation of
rubbing the hands together.
,G 'o techni2ue.
7G The techni2ue of rotation.
EG Repeating aloud the desire to remain in the phase.
'D In 6hich situations is falling asleep in the phase (ost
likely:
1G .hen looking for a desired person.
5G .hen communicating (ith animate ob%ects.
,G .hen completely calm ha&ing completely halted all
acti&ity.
7G .hen tra&elling aimlessly.
EG .hen taking part in side e&ents.
*D )hich of the follo6ing indicators guarantees that the
phase has been e-ited for reality:
1G 1 clock sho(s the right time and the same time e&en if
a practitioner turns a(ay from it and then looks at it again.
5G 4ensations are completely realistic.
,G The presence of friends or family in the room (ho
communicate (ith the practitioner.
7G 1n inner feeling that the phase has ended.
EG 'othing happens after staring at the end of a finger from
close distance for fi&e to 1A seconds.
.D In 6hich situations should tra>elling in the phase be
deliberately discontinued:
1G .hen a fear that a return (ill be impossible or a direct
fear of death arises.
5G .hen there is a real possibility that the practitioner (ill
be late for something in the physical (orld.
,G .hen frightened by some strange e&ents or ob%ects.
7G .hen there is an ine#plicable mortal fear of something
unkno(n or incomprehensible.
EG )f someone in the phase strongly insists that the
practitioner should return to reality.
FG )f sharp pain occurs in the body that is not caused by
interaction (ith ob%ects in the phase (orld.
/D )hat 6ill (ost likely occur 6hen trying to e>ade so(e
a6ful being or dangerous person:
1G The ob%ect (ill get bored and stop.
5G Fear of the ob%ect (ill go a(ay.
,G The phase (ill occur more fre2uently as (ell as be
longer and deeper than usual.
7G The practitioner (ill become calmer and unner&ed less
fre2uently.
EG The more fear there is the more often the ob%ect (ill
chase the practitioner.
0D )hen should establishing >ision in the phase be
consideredJ if it has not occurred on its o6n:
1G )mmediately upon separation (ithout deepening.
5G )mmediately after deepening.
,G .hile flying through dark space during translocation.
7G 1fter fi&e to 1A seconds of being sure that a phase entry
has occurred.
EG .hen there is a desire to immediately e#plore the
surroundings after separation has occurred.
1D 7o6 is it possible to pass through a 6all 6hile standing
close to itJ 6ithout stopping to look at it fro( close range:
1G 5y gradually pushing the hands and arms through it and
then the entire body and head.
5G 5y gradually pushing the head through it at first and
then the entire body.
,G 5y trying to put a hole in it and then e#panding the hole
and climbing through it.
7G 5y ramming it (ith a shoulder trying to bring it do(n.

"3D )hile in the phaseJ a practitioner is in a situation 6here
the ar(s are totally paralyHed and i((obiliHedD #his happens in
a roo( 6ith a single e-itC a door that has started to closeD )hat
are the t6o easiest 6ays to keep the door open:
1G Order the door to stay open in a loud imperious and
asserti&e manner.
5G Free the arms and hold back the door.
,G 4top the door (ith telekinesis.
7G ,reate a person through the method of finding.
EG There is no (ay to do this.
"D )hat difficulties (ay arise for a practitioner in the phase
6hile using the door techni$ue of translocation:
1G The door (ill not open.
5G The (rong place is behind the door.
,G )t is not possible to use the hand to pull the door handle
because the hand goes through the handle.
7G 7ifficulties (ith internal concentration occur at the
critical moment.
EG 1 black &oid often appears on the other side of the door.
""D )hat are necessary conditions for getting results 6hen
translocating in the phase after rolling out during initial
separation fro( the body:
1G 1bsence of &ision.
5G Practicing after sunset.
,G 1 firm intention to end up some(here.
7G ,ertainty of the final result.
EG The presence of &ibrations.
"%D A practitioner is in a dark roo( in the phase 6here
e>erything is poorly >isibleD #here is a chandelierJ but no light
s6itchD 7o6 can the s6itch be acti>ated to light the roo(:
1G Translocate through teleportation to the place (here the
toggle or s(itch for the light in 2uestion is located.
5G Find a flashlight through the method of finding and
illuminate the room (ith it.
,G Rub the light bulbs in the chandelier (ith the hands.
7G ,reate a light s(itch in the room using the method of
finding an ob%ect.
EG ,lose the eyes and imagine that the room is already lit
and then open the eyes.
"'D )hen co((unicating 6ith an ani(ate object in the phaseJ
a desire to add a specific person to the scenery arisesD )hich of
the follo6ing actions are ad>isable only for beginners in this
case:
1G Propose going to a neighboring room (here the needed
sub%ect (ill be presented through the use of the door or corner
techni2ue.
5G 4ummon the needed person by calling their name loudly.
,G Translocate back to the same place and ha&e both
animate ob%ects present there upon your return.
7G 1dd the needed person through the closed eyes
techni2ue.
EG 1sk the animate ob%ect that you are talking to if it does
not mind adding someone to the scenery.
"*D )here is one not allo6ed to go using translocation
techni$ues:
1G )nside a mammoth.
5G To the past or the future.
,G To hea&en.
7G To an episode of the mo&ie Star 5ars.
".D 7o6 6ill a deceased person differ fro( a prototype in the
phase 6hen correctly perfor(ing the techni$ue for finding the
person:
1G Only the practitioner himself can con%ure up differences
or not see or percei&e them.
5G The deceased (ill ha&e a different timbre of &oice.
,G There (ill be a radiant halo around the deceasedDs head.
7G Physical perception of the deceased (ill be less realistic
than in real life.
EG The deceased (ill not remember anything.
"/D )hat difficulties can arise in the phase 6hile obtaining
infor(ation fro( ani(ate sources of infor(ation:
1G )nability to remember information obtained.
5G 4ources of information are silent.
,G )nade2uateness of the sources of information.
7G 4e#ual attraction if the source of information is of the
opposite or desired se#.
EG 5eing gi&en false information.
"0D 7o6 (ight a practitioner accelerate the healing process of
a cold that is characteriHed by a stuffy nose and a sore throat:
1G Maintaining and amplifying &ibrations for the entire
length of the phase and entering it o&er se&eral days in a ro(.
5G Taking aspirin and entering the phase o&er se&eral days
in a ro(.
,G Tra&elling to hot places in the phase and entering it o&er
se&eral days in a ro(.
7G E#periencing stressful situations o&er se&eral phases.
EG Finding a doctor in the phase and asking him (hat it is
best to do in real"life or e&en in the phase itself.
"1D )hich of the follo6ing achie>e(ents belong to Stephen
;aBerge:
1G Founding the 0ucidity )nstitute.
5G 1 Ph.7. in anthropology.
,G 4cientifically pro&ing that lucid dreaming is possible.
7G 1 Ph.7. in psychophysiology.
EG Pro&ing that eye mo&ements in the phase and in reality
are synchroni=ed.
%3D )ho of approached the study of the phase state fro( a
prag(atic point-of->ie6 that 6as totally de>oid of occultis(:
1G 4tephen 0a5erge
5G Robert Monroe
,G 4yl&an Muldoon
7G ,harles 0eadbeater
EG Patricia 3arfield
FG ,arlos ,astaneda
Appendi-
ASSESS,E+# O2 P9AC#I#IO+E9S5
EEPE9IE+CES @C7AP#E9 "A

These assessments of the practitionersD e#periences refer only to
the specific descriptions that they submitted and are not meant as an
assessment of their practice as a (hole. 4ome of practitioners (ould
easily be able to e#perience successful phases earning four to fi&e
points at other times. This especially concerns 5oris Pronyakin
1le#ander 7yrenko& 5oris 5ender and 1le#ei Teslenko. This is
also possibly true of the other practitioners (ith (hom the author is
not closely ac2uainted.
'o. 1 5oris Pronyakin I A.; points
'o. + 1le#ei 5akhare& I A.; points
'o. 8 7mitry Marko& I A points
'o. : )&an Pako&le& I 1.; points
'o. ; 'atalya Bo=heno&a I 1 point
'o. < 1le#ander Furmenko& I 1 point
'o.> Roman Reuto& I 8 points
'o. ? 1le#ander 7yrenko& I 1.; points
'o. @ 4&yatosla& 5arano& I + points
'o. 1A Oleg 4ushchenko I +.; points
'o. 11 1le#ander 0eleko& I 1.; points
'o. 1+ 5oris 5ender I + points
'o. 18 1le#ei Teslenko I 8 points
A+S)E9S #O #7E 2I+A; #ES# @C7AP#E9 'A
1. 15,7J
+. 7J
8. 5 , 7J
:. ,J
;. 15,7J
<. 5J
>. I
?. ,J
@. 1 7 EJ
1A. 5 ,J
11. 1,7EJ
1+. 171Q7J
18. ,J
1:. 7 EJ
1;. EJ
1<. 5 FJ
1>. , EJ
1?. 5 7J
1@. I
+A. 1 ,J
+1. 1 5 7J
++. 1 , 7J
+8. EJ
+:. 5J
+;. IJ
+<. 1J
+>. 5,7EJ
+?. 5,EJ
+@. 1,7EJ
8A. 1 EJ
A SI,P;I2IE& &ESC9IP#IO+ O2 #7E EASIES#
,E#7O& 2O9 E+#E9I+G #7E P7ASE
4SI+G I+&I9EC# #EC7+I<4ES
Upon a(akening (ithout mo&ing or opening the eyes
immediately try to separate from oneEs body. The separation attempt
should be carried out (ithout any imagining but rather (ith the
desire to make a real mo&ement (ithout straining the muscles
Frolling out le&itation standing up etc.G.
)f separation does not occur (ithin three to fi&e seconds
immediately try alternating se&eral of the most effecti&e techni2ues
for three to fi&e seconds each. .hen one of the techni2ues (orks
continue it for a longer period of time-
" Obser&ing images- Try to e#amine and discern the pictures
arising before closed eyes.
" 0istening in- 1ttempt to hear sounds in the head and make these
louder by listening in or strengthening the (illJ
" Rotating- )magine rotating around the head"to"foot a#isJ
" Phantom (iggling- Try to mo&e a part of the body (ithout
straining the muscles and try to increase the range of mo&ementJ
" 4training the brain- Try straining the brain (hich (ill lead to
&ibrations that may also be intensified by straining the brain.
1s soon as one techni2ue clearly starts to (ork continue (ith it
as long as progress is apparent and then try to separate. )f separation
fails return to the techni2ue that (as (orking.
7o not gi&e up alternating through techni2ues until one minute has
elapsed but do not continue for more than t(o minutes. 4eparation
from the body may be attempted periodically especially if interesting
sensations occur.
#A=E PA9# I+ 9ESEA9C7
Take part in the research of a techni2ue. The techni2ue of
imagined sensations is described in ,hapter + in the section on
4econdary Techni2ues. This techni2ue is also commonly kno(n as
the !cell phone techni2ue$. .hile this guidebook (as being (ritten
e#periments (ith this techni2ue (ere conducted at the 4chool of Out"
of"5ody Tra&elDs seminars. Results (ere astounding. 7ue to the fact
that this techni2ue is easy to understand and apply in practice it
could be the most straightfor(ard and effecti&e one for achie&ing the
phase state. 1lmost e&ery second attempt made (ith this techni2ue
has yielded results pro&ided it is employed as an indirect techni2ue.
7ue to this techni2ueDs huge potential for populari=ing and
spreading kno(ledge of the phenomenon anyone (ho is interested is
in&ited to take part in a global e#periment of the techni2ueDs
effecti&eness. )n addition to testing it a researcher may propose the
techni2ue to interested persons or post it on the )nternet to increase
the number of practitioners. Please submit the results of your
e#periments (ith the techni2ue to the e"mail address- aing*aing.ru
6ere it is-
#7E CE;; P7O+E #EC7+I<4E
The practice of this phase entry techni2ue is to imagine the
sensation that something is resting in the hand desirably upon
a(akening (ithout any physical mo&ement. )t is best to imagine a
cell phone is in the hand because the modern person is 2uite
accustomed to this sensation although any other ob%ect (ill do. )t is
necessary to acti&ely and attenti&ely focus on the sensations in the
palm of the hand. Most likely the physical sensation of a phone lying
in the hand (ill 2uickly arise. The sensation (ill become increasingly
palpable. )f a sensation does not arise (ithin 1A seconds the
techni2ue not going to (ork and it is time to s(itch to another one.
.hen the sensation of a phone in the hand occurs focus e&ery bit
of attention on it. )t should be noted that this (ill not be an imagined
sensation but a real one. This should be understood from the &ery
beginning and results should be e#pected. Once the sensation is
stable start feeling the mobile phone (ith the fingers. Physical
sensations should be e#perienced. The physical body of course must
not mo&e or strain. )f this does not (ork only focus attention on the
sensation of the phone lying in the hand and try to feel the phone
(ith the fingers later. )f feeling the phone (ith the fingers is
successful acti&ely roll the phone around the hand feeling all of its
details.
1s soon as it is possible to roll the cell phone around in the hand
separation from the body may be attempted. )n this case it is usually
easiest to separate by rolling out or standing up. ,ontinue to hold the
phone and roll it around (hich (ill maintain the emerging phase
state. 4eparation in this case should be more like actually getting up
physically or rolling out of bed rather than actually separating one
thing from something else. That is do this in the same (ay as
physically getting out of bed starting from the sensation of the phone
in the hand.
)f separation is unsuccessful continue to attenti&ely feel the phone
in the hand for a little (hile longer and try to separate again. )f
separation happens the ne#t step is to take actions that are typical for
a phase e#perience- deepening and then accomplishing
predetermined tasks (hile performing !maintaining$ techni2ues. )f
only a partial separation occurs then separation by force should be
attempted.
3enerally the real sensation of a phone in the hand arises (ith
e&ery second attempt. Furthermore achie&ing success only re2uires
e#perience and some de#terity since feeling the sensation of a phone
in the hand signifies that the re2uired state has been reached and
subse2uent actions may be attempted.
A##E+#IO+F
.hen making attempts to enter the phase the practitioner should
ha&e complete confidence that he (ill be immediately successful in
e&erything. E&en a shroud of doubt (ill keep the practitioner in his
body this is especially true (hen it comes to indirect techni2ues.
Four typical barriers to mastering the phase encountered by @AK of
practicioners-
1 " Forgetting to deepen the phase
+ " Forgetting to maintain the phase
8 " 1bsence of a plan of action (hen in the phase
: " Forgetting to try to re"enter the phase after a foul
#7E SC7OO; O2 O4#-O2-BO&8 #9A?E;
Michael RadugaDs 4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el conducts
training seminars in many countries around the (orld. The
course(ork allo(s students to master the phase phenomenon and
hone their skills at tra&eling in the phase. )nformation on e#isting
branches and seminar schedules are a&ailable on the (ebsite
www.obe4u.com. .e also (elcome potential partners interested in
organi=ing 4chool of Out"of"5ody Tra&el branches and seminars. 1ll
correspondence regarding seminars partnerships and proposals
related to the translation of this book may be handled by e"mail at
aing*aing.ru.
B9IE2 G;OSSA98 O2 #E9,S A+& &E2I+I#IO+S
Out-of-Body e-perience @OBEAJ lucid drea(ing @;&AJ astral ! a
number of terms united by the phase that refer to the state in (hich a
person (hile being fully conscious reali=es consciousness outside
the normal range of physical perception.
Indirect techni$ues I entry into the phase (ithin fi&e minutes of
a(akening from sleep of any duration " pro&ided there has been
minimal physical mo&ement.
&irect techni$ues I entry into the phase (ithout any prior sleep
after e#cessi&e physical mo&ement upon a(akening or ha&ing been
a(ake for at least fi&e minutes.
&rea( Consciousness I entry into the phase through becoming
consciously a(are (hile a dream episode is happening.
&issociation I separationJ in this case a scientific term describing
e#periences in the phase.
Sleep paralysis I a stuporJ the complete immobili=ation that often
occurs (hen falling asleep a(akening and entering or e#iting the
phase.
Stencil I the real physical body that is no longer percei&ed (hile in
the phase.
&eepening the phase I methods for making the phase as realistic
as possible by stabili=ing the surrounding space.
,aintaining the phase I methods for maintaining the phase state
by pre&enting a lapse into sleep a return to reality or an imagined
return to reality.
9E, I rapid eye mo&ement sleep FREM phaseGJ a sleep phase that
is characteri=ed by increased brain acti&ity that is accompanied by
rapid eye mo&ement and dreaming.
2oul I an inad&ertent termination of the phase through a
spontaneous return to e&eryday reality.
Cycles of indirect techni$ues "" the easiest (ay to enter the phase
employed by rapidly alternating certain techni2ues upon a(akening
from sleep until one of them (orks.
SC7OO; O2 O4#-O2-BO&8 #9A?E; II
PE9SO+A; EEPE9IE+CES
#his book is the freestanding supple(ent to KSchool of Out-of-
Body #ra>el D A Practical GuidebookL. It is intended to gi>e a
first-hand de(onstration of the out-of-body e-perience in
practiceJ 6hile bringing attention to correct actions and (istakes
(ade 6hen out-of-bodyD
)tDs one thing to kno( (hich techni2ues can be used to control and
lea&e the perception of the body but another thing to actually kno(
ho( to use those techni2ues. )tDs one thing to read descriptions of a
single indi&idualDs e#periences but another to learn about ho( a
large number of other practitioners regard the techni2ues and feel
about them. 'ot e&eryone is able to figure out (hat e#actly to do and
ho( to do it (ithout reading this book. Techni2ue"related theory and
real e#perience are essentially t(o different things.
The po(er inherent in this collection of personal practitioner
e#periences is such that e&en if you ne&er intend to try out the
techni2ues described in it you are practically guaranteed to
ne&ertheless encounter this phenomenon as it (ill enter your
subconscious mind as a kind of programming that (ill sooner or later
acti&ate at the right moment. This collection is all the more beneficial
for those (ho (ould like to recei&e real guidance in their
e#plorations. 1ll of the fundamental mistakes that practitioners are
prone to make are described and analy=ed here. 6a&ing read the
book the practitioner (ill be armed (ith kno(ledge of the most
distilled and &erified kind.
)n preparation for this book the personal e#periences of hundreds of
practitioners (ere collected at seminars through the (ebsite and by
mail. 6o(e&er only the most demonstrati&e descriptions (ere
chosen for inclusion. Thus the selected descriptions are in&aluable
not only for those (ho ha&e %ust started out on their %ourney (ith the
most e#traordinary practice of out"of"body tra&el but also for those
(ho already ha&e substantial e#perience (ith it.
) (ould like to e#press my gratitude to all those (ho assisted me in
putting together this one"of"a"kind compilation. Pou ha&e made a
contribution to this field of study and it only remains for me to (ish
you further success (hich (ill sho( that my commentary on your
e#periences (as right on.
Michael Raduga
Founder of the School of Out-of-Body Travel
March 2, 2!
Table of ,ontents-
Part
0ea&ing the Perception of the 5ody
Part II
Out"of"5ody E#periments
Part III
The E#periences of .ell"Bno(n 1uthors
Part I?
7emonstrati&e ,ase 4tudies
Appendi-
www.obe4u.com
Proposals regarding translating and publishing this book and other
(orks of M.Raduga may be sent to aing@aing.ru
#he real na(e of this book is KSchool of Out-of-Body #ra>el D
A Practical GuidebookL
#his e-book is free >ia +etD
Send it to all your friendsF
Post it on your sites and blogsF

School PF Astral Projection Michael Reduga

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

School PF Astral Projection Michael Reduga

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

1

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi